foreword - brockandbecca.combrockandbecca.com/files/fj/fj_cruiser_owners_manual.pdf · quality...

i2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

ForewordWelcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:U.S. OWNERS: � When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331� Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515CANADIAN OWNERS: � When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.Please access our websites for further information.� The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com� Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com� Canada www.toyota.ca

2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.

05 11.29

ii2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.

05 11.29

iii2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time toread Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receive themaximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems thisvehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual isthe most important Section for you and your family toread.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These systems work together alongwith the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provideoccupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect ofeach system is enhanced when it is used properly andtogether with other systems. No single occupant restraintsystem can, by itself, provide you or your family with theequal level of restraint which these systems can providewhen used together. That is why it is important for you andyour family to understand the purpose and proper use ofeach of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in theevent of collision. However, the more you know aboutthese systems and how to use them properly, the greateryour chances become of surviving an accident withoutdeath or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants ofthe vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wearseat belts properly at all times. Children should always besecured in child restraint systems that are appropriate fortheir age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutesfor them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducingthe risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact ofthe head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

05 11.29

iv2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy withtremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sourcesof death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to anairbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body hasbeen placed between the occupant and the airbag at thetime of deployment. This is just one example of how theinstructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will helpensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, andincrease the safety they can provide to you and your fami-ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your timeof ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist indriving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is asystem to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In acrash or a near car crash event, this device may recordsome or all of the following information:

� Engine speed

� Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� Position of the transmission selector lever

� Whether the driver and front passenger wore theseat belts or not

� Driver’s seat position

� Front passenger’s occupant classification

05 11.29

v2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

� SRS airbag deployment data

� SRS airbag system diagnostic data

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con-tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situationswhich include activating the VSC under which the VSCEDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR mayrecord some or all of the following information:

� Behavior of the vehicle

� Steering wheel angle

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� To what extent the brake pedal was applied

� To what extent the ECU controlled the condition ofthe 4 wheels

� Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to athird party except when:

� An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

� Officially requested by the police or other authorities

� Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

� Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

� Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

� Disclose the data to a third party for researchpurposes without disclosing details of the vehicleowner, and only when it is deemed necessary

� Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non−Toyota organization forresearch purposes

05 11.29

vi2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

� Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

05 11.29

vii2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

05 11.29

viii2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol-lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau-tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa-tion.

� Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiportfuel injection system

� SRS airbag system

� Seat belt pretensioner system

� Traction control system

� Active traction control system (four−wheel drive models with rear differential lock)

� “AUTO LSD” system (two−wheel drive models)

� Vehicle stability control system

� Cruise control system

� Anti−lock brake system

� Electronic throttle control system

Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire inflation pressureand the excess load may result in the deteriorationof steering ability and braking ability, leading toan accident. Check the tire inflation pressure peri-odically and be sure to keep the load limits givenin this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire infla-tion pressure and load limits, see pages 297 and225.

05 11.29

ix2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.

On−pavement and off−roaddriving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve-hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than othertypes of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passenger car because it isdesigned for off−road use also. In addition, this vehiclehas a higher ground clearance and center of gravity thanthat of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea-ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol-lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result inloss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing deathor serious injury. Be sure to read “Off−road vehicle precau-tions” on page 204 in Section 2 and “Off−road driving pre-cautions” on page 234 in Section 3.

05 11.29

x2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. Thischeck is done approximately five hours after the engine isturned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. Itdoes not indicate a malfunction.

05 11.29

2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

05 11.29

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.


05 11.29

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for FJ CRUISER may be pur-

chased from any Toyota dealer or the Material

Distribution Center. To purchase the repair

manual, please contact your Toyota dealer or call

the Material Distribution Center toll−free at

1−800−622−2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat-er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main-tenance is required and clearly explains how to do thework yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.


05 11.29

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU � PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U


05 11.29

I

Publication No. OM35857UPart No. 01999-35857Printed in Japan 01−0601−00

FJ ( U)

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 101. . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle will not start 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your engine stalls while driving 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break−in period 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the engine 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

Premium UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 91 (Research Octane Number96) or higher.

See page 205 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 72 L (19.0 gal., 15.8 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil: ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 293 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 297 through 304.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 320.

U−1


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 1

2 2007 FJ CRUISER from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM35857U)

1. Side defroster outlets

2. Side vents

3. Auxiliary box

4. Instrument cluster

5. Accessory meter

6. Center vents

7. Glove box

8. Power door lock switches

9. Power window switches

10. Automatic transmission selector lever

11. Cup holders

12. Parking brake lever

13. Four−wheel drive control lever

14. Tilt steering lock release lever

15. Window lock switch

05 11.29

Instrument panel overview�View A

(vehicles with automatic transmission)

TS11001a


1. Side defroster outlets

2. Side vents

3. Auxiliary box

4. Instrument cluster

5. Accessory meter

6. Center vents

7. Glove box

8. Power door lock switches

9. Power window switches

10. Four−wheel drive control lever

11. Cup holders

12. Parking brake lever

13. Manual transmission gear shift lever

14. Tilt steering lock release lever

15. Window lock switch

05 11.29

�View A(vehicles with manual transmission)

TS11002a


1. Power rear view mirror control switches

2. Instrument panel light control dial

3. Headlight and turn signal switches

4. Wiper and washer switches

5. Back window defogger switch

6. Emergency flasher switch

7. Audio system

8. Clock

9. Front passenger occupant classificationindicator light

10. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight

11. Air conditioning controls

12. Rear differential lock switch

13. Active traction control switch

14. Sub woofer on−off switch

15. Power outlet

16. AUX adapter

17. Intuitive parking assist switch

18. Power outlet main switch

19. “AUTO LSD” switch

20. Ignition switch

21. Cruise control switch

22. Hood lock release lever

23. Clutch start cancel switch

05 11.29

�View B

TS11003b


TS11004b

1. Volume control switch

2. “��” switch

3. “MODE” switch

05 11.29

�Steering switches


TS11005

1. Tachometer

2. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Voltmeter

5. Shift position indicator lights(automatic transmission only)

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Fuel gauge

8. Trip meter reset knob

9. Odometer and two trip meters

05 11.29

Instrument cluster overview


or

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

� Vehicle stability control system warninglight∗1

� Traction control system warninglight∗1two−wheel drive models

� Active traction control system warning light∗1

(four−wheel drive models with reardifferential lock)

� “AUTO LSD” system warning light∗1

(two−wheel drive models)

Automatic transmission fluid temperaturewarning light∗1 (four−wheel drive models)

Unengaged “Park” warning light∗1

(four−wheel drive models)

Front passenger occupant classification indicatorlight

05 11.29

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel


Center differential lock indicator light∗2

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Slip indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Rear differential lock indicator light∗3

Headlight high beam indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light(two−wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light

Four−wheel drive indicator light∗2

(four−wheel drive models)

Cruise control indicator light∗4

Active traction control system indicator light(four−wheel drive models with rear differentiallock)

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 101 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Four−wheel drive system” on page120 in Section 1−7.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Rear differential lock system” onpage 132 in Section 1−7.

∗4: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 135 inSection 1−7.

05 11.29


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access doors 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 2


LS12001

These keys work in every lock.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle.

LS12002

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

TS12005

1. “LOCK” switch

2. “UNLOCK” switch

3. “PANIC” switch

05 11.29

Keys Wireless remote control—


The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door or activate the“PANIC” mode from a distance withinapproximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter in placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or alarm, oroperate from a normal distance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may be depleted. Checkthe battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “—Replacingbattery” on page 15.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 269 inSection 4.)

TS12006a

Locking operation

TS12007a

Unlocking operation

05 11.29

—Locking and unlockingdoors


To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches ofthe transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time one beep willbe heard, and the turn signal lights flashonce.

Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors, back door orback window is not securely closed, lock-ing cannot be performed by the “LOCK”switch and a beep will sound continuouslyfor 10 seconds. However, if the key is inthe ignition switch, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the side doors,back door and back window securely orpush the “UNLOCK” switch.

The beep can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,and the turn signal lights will flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed,the interior light and luggage compartmentlight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out. (For details,see “Interior light” on page 92 and“Luggage compartment light” on page 93in Section 1−5.)

You have 60 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again and one beep will beheard.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the wireless door locking orunlocking function

� Cancelling the flash of the turn signallights

� Changing the volume of beep sound

05 11.29


TS12008

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows thehorn intermittently and flashes theheadlights, tail lights, turn signal lightsand outside rear view mirror illumina-tion light (on some models), and turnson the interior and luggage compart-ment lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, push any of the switch onthe wireless remote control transmitter.You can also stop the alarm by turningthe ignition key from the “LOCK” to “ON”position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

05 11.29

—Activating panic mode


NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

05 11.29


For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

TS12009

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

TS12010

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery by ballpoint pen.

Insert the tip of ballpoint pen at theguide groove and lift as shown in theabove illustration.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

05 11.29

—Replacing battery


TS12011

3. Put in a new transmitter battery withpositive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery are faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

TS12012

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontside door. In the driver’s door lock, turn-ing the key once will unlock the driver’sdoor and twice in succession will unlockall the side doors and back door simulta-neously.

05 11.29

Side doors


This double key turning operation to un-lock all the side doors and back door canbe changed to a single key turning opera-tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-er.

When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked with a key, the interiorlight and luggage compartment light willcome on and remain on for about 15 sec-onds before fading out. (For details, see“Interior light” on page 92 and “Luggagecompartment light” on page 93 in Section1−5.)

TS12013

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handles even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if youleave the key in the ignition switch.

05 11.29


TS12014

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side. To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do either of the following, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

� Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when all the side doors,back door and back window are closed.

� Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

� Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

� Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

� Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the sidedoors and back door with the powerdoor lock switch.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being opened un-intentionally.

05 11.29


TS12028a

For easy access to the rear seat, openthe access door (rear door).

To open: First, open the front door widely.Then pull (from the outside) or push (fromthe inside) the inside handle of the accessdoor forward.

If you try to open the front and rear doorssimultaneously, they will not open.

To close: First, close the access doorcompletely. Then close the front door.

You can open and close the access dooronly when the front door is widely opened.

NOTICE

The front door and access door couldbe damaged if they hit each otherwhen being opened or closed. Besure to follow the above instructions.

TS12029a

CAUTION

When closing the access door, con-firm safety of the area around. Keepthe hands, fingers and other parts ofthe bodies of all occupants awayfrom the access door. Otherwise, theclosing door may cause serious inju-ry.

05 11.29

Access doors


TS12015

The windows can be operated with theswitch on either front door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, all the power windows work for 43seconds even after the ignition switch isturned off. It stops working when eitherfront door is opened.

The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switchtells you the switch can be operated.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch. TS12016

Automatic operation (to open only):Push the switch completely down and thenrelease it. The window will fully open. Tostop the window partway, lightly pull theswitch up and then release it.

05 11.29

Power windows


TS12017Windowlockswitch

Driver’s side

TS12018

Passenger’s side

OPERATING THE PASSENGER’SWINDOW

Use the switch on the front passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control the front passenger’swindow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passenger’s windowcannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personalinjury, you must do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

05 11.29


� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

TS12027

To open the back window, turn the keyclockwise and hold it for about 1 se-cond.

After the door is locked, the windowopens slightly, and then lift the back win-dow.

You can open the back window when theback window wiper is working. At thattime, the wiper returns to the originalposition and stops working.

The wiper restarts its working about 3seconds after the back window is closed.

If the back window is not securely closed,the back window wiper and washer willnot work. (See “Back window wiper andwasher” on page 95 and “Back windowdefogger” on page 96 in Section 1−5.)

To close the back window, lower it. Afterclosing the back window, try pulling it upto make sure it is securely closed.

When you close the back window, becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

05 11.29

Back window


CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personalinjury, you must do the following.

� Before you close the back window,always make sure there is nobodyaround the back window. You mustalso make sure the heads, handsand other parts of the bodies of alloccupants are kept completely in-side the vehicle. If someone’s neck,head or hands get caught in a clos-ing window, it could result in deathor serious injury. When anyonecloses the back window, make surehe or she operates the windowsafely.

� Keep the back window closed whiledriving. This not only keeps theluggage from being thrown out butalso prevents exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the back win-dow dampers, do not apply any force,paint or let any other foreign matteron them.

TS12019a

Insert the key into the key hole andturn it.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

All the doors lock and unlock simulta-neously with back door.

When you turn the key clockwise and holdit for about 1 second, the window opens.(For details, see “Back window” on page22 in this Section.)

Operating the power door lock switch si-multaneously locks or unlocks all the sidedoors and the back door. (See “—Lockingand unlocking doors” on page 11 and“Side doors” on page 16.)

To open the back door, pull the back dooropener.

When the back door is opened, it can beheld in the half−open position. However, itcannot be held in this position when beingclosed.

The back door can be fixed in its fullopen position. (For details, see “—Backdoor fixing function” on page 24.)

When closing the back door, make sureit is securely closed.

See “Cargo and luggage” on page 226 forprecautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION

Keep the back window and back doorclosed while driving. This not onlykeeps the luggage from being thrownout but also prevents exhaust gasesfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the back doordamper, do not apply any force, paintor let any other foreign matter on it.

05 11.29

Back door—


TS12026d

1.Lock2.Unlock

The back door can be fixed when it isfully open.

To lock: Fully open the back door andthen pull the damper. The back door isfixed in the full open position.

Check to see that the back door is fixed.

To unlock: Push the damper. The fixedback door is released.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the damper, en-sure that the damper is unlocked be-fore closing the back door.

TS12020

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

TS12021

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch l ever and lift thehood.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. Then lower the hood and make sureit locks into place. If necessary, pressdown gently on the front edge to lock it.

05 11.29

—Back door fixing function Hood


TS12022

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

TS12023

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thedoor toward out as shown.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allowopen flames when refueling. Thefumes are flammable.

NOTICE

In order to prevent the fuel f iller doorfrom being damaged, do not apply ex-cessive force.

TS12024a

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap slowly counterclockwise,then pause slightly before removingit. After removing the cap, hang thetether as shown in the illustration.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

CAUTION

When opening the cap, do not removethe cap quickly. In hot weather, fuelunder pressure could cause injury byspraying out of the filler neck if thecap is suddenly removed.

05 11.29

Fuel tank cap


When installing the cap, turn it clock-wise until one click is heard, in orderto fully close it. The cap returns slight-ly when your hand is released from thecap after closure, however this doesnot cause any problems.

If the cap is not installed securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel sp illage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

05 11.29


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front passenger occupant classification system 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 3


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded−down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be killedor severely injured in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,death or severe injuries can occurin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

Waterproof and water−repellent seats areinstalled in your vehicle; however, the wa-ter−repellent effect does not last forever.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

05 11.29

SeatsFront seats— —Front seat precautions


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such change may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat−lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

05 11.29

—Seat adjustment precautions


� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

TS13001

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTINGKNOB (driver’s seat only)

To change the angle of the seat cush-ion on the front side, turn the knobeither way.

3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER(driver’s seat only)

To change the height of the seat, pullup or push down the lever.

4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

05 11.29

—Adjusting front seats


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

TS13004a

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

Stow the rear seat belt buckles asshown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckles fromfalling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat beltbuckles, the seat belt buckles mustbe stowed before you fold the seat-back.

TS13006

1. Remove the head restraint.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the head re-straints, the head restraints must beremoved before you fold down theseatback.

05 11.29

Rear seats——Folding down rear seats


TS13007a

2. Swing the bottom cushion up bypulling the lock rel ease strap.

Each bottom cushion can be swung upseparately.

TS13008

3. Push the lock release button andfold down the seatback.

This will enlarge the luggage compartmentas far as the raised seat cushion. See“—Stowage precautions” on page 226 inSection 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

Each seatback can be folded separatelyand the seat bottom cushions can be re-moved. See “—Removing rear seat bottomcushions” on page 33.

TS13009

WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK

If you cannot raise the seatback becauseof the locked seat belt, do not try to forceit. Release the lock of the seat belt in thefollowing way.

1. Push in the lower front edge of theseatback to slacken the seat belt.

2. Let the seat belt retract a little.

05 11.29


CAUTION

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent death orserious injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

� Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

� Make sure the bottom cushion issecurely locked by pu lling up theedge of the cushion.

� Make sure the bottom cushion issecurely locked by pressing downthe cushion near the lock releasestraps.

� Make sure to arrange the buckles ofthe seat belts in their proper posi-tion and be ready to use.

TS13004a

BEFORE REMOVING REAR SEAT BOT-TOM CUSHIONS

Stow the rear seat belt buckles asshown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckles fromfalling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat beltbuckles, the seat belt buckles mustbe stowed before you remove the rearseat bottom cushion.

TS13007

1. Swing the bottom cushion up bypulling the lock rel ease strap.

05 11.29

—Removing rear seat bottomcushions


TS13074b

Hexagonhead bolt

Dial

2. Loosen the bolts with the wrench atfirst and turn the dials with hands toremove them.

Turn them counterclockwise to loosen.

TS13075

3. Separate the bottom cushion fromthe hinge.

TS13076

4. Fold the hinge as shown in the il-lustration.

Each bottom cushion can be removedseparately.

05 11.29


CAUTION

To prevent death or serious injury ina collision or s udden stop:

� Do not get in the vehicle with thebottom cushions uninstalled.

� Do not leave the removed bottomcushion unsecured in the vehicle.

� Do not try to sit on or place any-thing on the removed bottom cush-ion.

� Do not drop the bottom cushion.

TS13077

When the bottom cushion is reinstalled,click the claw of the hinge into the holeof the bottom cushion before refasteningthe dial.

CAUTION

When the bottom cushions are rein-stalled, tighten the hexagon headbolts to 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 12.5 ft·lbf)using a torque wrench, or have themtightened by your Toyota dealer. Fail-ure to do so may cause the dials tobe loosened and the bottom cushionsto be removed, which may result indeath or serious injury.

TS13010

Front seats

TS13011

Rear seats

05 11.29

Head restraints


For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Rear head restraints—When an occupantsits on the rear seat, always pull up therear head restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

TS13017

To adjust the armrest, lower the arm-rest to the lowest position and raise itto the desired angle. Raising the arm-rest to the highest position unlocks thearmrest to let you return it to the low-est position.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 65 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

05 11.29

ArmrestSeat belts——Seat belt precautions


Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendation.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal co llision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or personal in-jury.

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or side doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belts—they mayseverely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 275in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

05 11.29


TS13012Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 65 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

TS13013

Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

05 11.29

—Fastening front and rearseat belts


CAUTION

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon hips as possible.

� Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

TS13014

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your s houlder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causedeath or serious injuries in a colli-sion.

05 11.29


TS13015

To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

TS13004a

The rear seat belt buckles can bestowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckle must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback. (See “—Foldingdown rear seats” on page 31 or“—Removing rear seat bottom cushions”on page 33 in this Section.)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofdeath or serious injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

05 11.29

—Stowing rear seat beltbuckles —Seat belt extender


TS13016

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

� Make sure the front passenger oc-cupant classification indicator lightindicates “ON” when using the seatbelt extender for the front passen-ger seat. If the indicator light indi-cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-er tongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-nect the seat belt extender aftermaking sure the indicator light indi-cates “ON”. If you use the seat beltextender while the indicator lightindicates “OFF”, the front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on thefront passenger side may not acti-vate correctly, which could causedeath or serious injury in the eventof collision.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

05 11.29


LS13092

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

TS13018

The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractors so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

05 11.29

—Seat belt pretensioners


The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 61 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

TS13078

The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following componentsand their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light


4. Front passenger occupant classificationECU

5. Load sensor

6. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

7. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

8. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non−toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

05 11.29


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

TS13019

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the seat belt pretensioners areoperating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbagsensors, side and curtain shield airbagsensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passengeroccupant classification system∗ andindicator light, seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, interconnectingwiring and power sources. (For details,see “Service reminder indicators andwarning buzzers” on page 101 in Section1−6.)∗:The front passenger occupant classifica-tion system includes the front passengeroccupant classification ECU, load sensorand front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch.

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on for more than 6seconds.

� The light comes on while driving.

05 11.29


� If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunctionor activation of the relevant seat beltpretensioner.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

The SRS warning light will come on andfront passenger occupant classification in-dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there isa malfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.

TS13025

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

� Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

TS13020

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCEDAIRBAGS” designed based on US motorvehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). Theairbag system controls airbag deploymentpower for the driver and front passenger.The driver airbag system consists of thedriver seat’s position sensor etc. The frontpassenger’s airbag system consists of thefront passenger occupant classificationsensor etc.

05 11.29

SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag


In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work with the seatbelts to help reduce injury by inflating.The SRS front airbags help reduce injuriesmainly to the driver’s or front passenger’shead or chest caused by hitting the ve-hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy ifluggage is put in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 61 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 36 in this Section.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 65 in thisSection.

05 11.29


The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

TS13029Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generallydesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, when ever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

TS13024Hitting a curb, edgeof pavement orhard surface

Falling into orjumping overa deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

05 11.29


TS13079

The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors



4. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)


6. Load sensor


8. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

9. Driver’s seat position sensor


11. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The airbag sensors constantly monitor theforward deceleration of the vehicle. If animpact results in a forward decelerationbeyond the designed threshold level, thesystem triggers the airbag inflators. At thistime a chemical reaction in the inflatorsvery quickly fills the airbags with non−tox-ic gas to help restrain the forward motionof the occupants. The front airbags thenquickly deflate, so that there is no ob-struction of the driver’s vision should it benecessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

05 11.29


Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without the driver actuallywearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-er’s airbag system will judge thatthe driver is wearing it. In thiscase, the driver’s airbag may notactivate correctly, causing death orserious injury in the event of colli-sion. Be sure to wear the seat beltwith the seat belt extender.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page28 in this Section.

05 11.29


TS13021

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

TS13022

� Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 65 in this Sec-tion.

TS13023a

� Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of the deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

05 11.29


� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag or airbagsensor assembly. Doing so may pre-vent the front airbag system fromactivating correctly, cause suddenactivation of the system or disablethe system, which could result indeath or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSfront airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.


� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

TS13019

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS front airbags are oper-ating properly.

05 11.29


This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system∗ and indicator light,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 101 in Section 1−6.)∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-tion system includes the front passengeroccupant classification ECU, load sensorand front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.




TS13026


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor dashboard (shaded in the illustra-tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-wise damaged.

05 11.29


NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

TS13030

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and rear outside passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest. TheSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-senger’s or rear outside passenger’s headand help prevent them from being thrownout of the vehicle.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat. (As for the front passenger oc-cupant classification system, see “Frontpassenger occupant classification system”on page 61 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-senger side are activated even with nopassenger in the front seat or rear outsideseat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

05 11.29

SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags


CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver,front passenger and rear outsidepassenger seat belt systems. Toensure maximum protection in anaccident, the driver and all passen-gers in the vehicle must wear theirseat belts properly. Wearing a seatbelt properly during an accidentreduces the chances of death orserious injury or being thrown outof the vehicle. For instructions andprecautions concerning the seatbelt system, see “Seat belts” onpage 36 in this Section.

� Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front p illar, rear pillar or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the occupant.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page65 in this Section.

05 11.29


TS13027

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

TS13028Collision from the rear

Vehicle rolloverCollision from the front

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not generally designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

TS13080a

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.



3. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)


5. Load sensor

6. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

7. Curtain shield airbag sensors

05 11.29


8. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors



The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non−toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars, and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andrear outside passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

Improper sitting and wearing of theseat belts may not retain you insidethe vehicle.

TS13031

� Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

05 11.29


TS13032

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead closer to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

TS13033

� Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

TS13034

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windowssince the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

05 11.29


TS13035

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

TS13036

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbags may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

05 11.29


� Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderail containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSside airbags and curtain shield air-bags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.


� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

TS13019

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.

05 11.29


This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbagsensors, side and curtain shield airbagsensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front passengeroccupant classification system∗ andindicator light, seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, interconnectingwiring and power sources. (For details,see “Service reminder indicators andwarning buzzers” on page 101 in Section1−6.)∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-tion system includes the front passengeroccupant classification ECU, load sensorand front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.




TS13037b

05 11.29



� Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail containing thecurtain shield airbags inside (shaded inthe illustration) is scratched, cracked,or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. The system detects conditions1—4 (Shown in the table on page 63)Based on these conditions, the systemsbelow are activated or deactivated:

� Front passenger airbag

� Side airbag on the front passengerseat

� Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er

The system monitors the weight andload on the front passenger seat, andthe seat belt buckle switch to determineconditions 1—4.

In order to ensure the system detectsthe conditions correctly:

� Do not place a heavy load on the frontpassenger seat.

� Do not attach a commercial seatbacktable or other heavy item to the backof the front passenger seat.

� Do not apply pressure to the front pas-senger seat by resting hands or legson the seatback.

TS13038

The front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light indicates the ac-tuation of the front passenger airbag,side airbag on the front passenger seat.

The front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light will indicate “ON”and “OFF” when the ignition key isturned to the “ON” position. Afterabout four seconds, it will go off. Afterthat, the front passenger occupant clas-sification system operates and judgeswhether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.

05 11.29

Front passenger occupantclassification system


The indicator light will indicate “OFF”when the ignition switch is in the “ON”position with the condition 2 in the tableshown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, oneof the following is likely to have occurred:

� A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

� Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

� The front passenger seatback is incontact with the rear seat.

To ensure that the system correctly de-tects the presence or absence of a personof adult size sitting in the front passengerseat, make sure that none of the aboveoccur.

Make sure that the “ON” indicator illumi-nated when a person of adult size isseated in the front passenger seat. If the“OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask thepassenger to sit up straight, well back inthe seat, and with the seat belt worn cor-rectly. If the “OFF” indicator remains illu-minated, either ask the passenger to moveto the rear seat, or if that is not possible,move the front passenger seat fully rear-ward.

TS13039

The SRS warning light will come onand front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light will indicate“OFF” if there is a malfunction in thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

05 11.29


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detected bythe front passenger

occupant classificationsystem

Frontpassengeroccupant

classificationindicator light

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “OFF” Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated Activated

3. Unoccupied Notilluminated

Off Off DeactivatedActivated

Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 65 in this Section as for installing thechild restraint system.)∗4:∗4:In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

05 11.29


CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

� Make sure the front passenger oc-cupant classification indicator lightindicates “ON” when using the seatbelt extender for the front passen-ger seat. If the indicator light indi-cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-er tongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-nect the seat belt extender aftermaking sure the indicator light indi-cates “ON”. If you use the seat beltextender while the indicator lightindicates “OFF”, the front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on thefront passenger side may not acti-vate correctly, which could causedeath or serious injury in the eventof collision.

� Do not recline the front passengerseatback so far that it touches arear seat. This may cause the“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,which indicates that the passen-ger’s airbags will not deploy in theevent of a severe accident. If theseatback touches the rear seat, re-turn the seatback to a positionwhere it does not touches the rearseat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

� If an adult sits in the front passen-ger seat, the occupant classificationindicator light should indicate “ON”.If the “OFF” indicator is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit upstraight, well back in the seat, feeton the floor, and with the seat beltworn correctly. If the “OFF” indica-tor still remains illuminated, eitherask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible,move the front passenger seat fullyrearward.

� Wear the seat belt properly.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

� Do not place a heavy load on thefront passenger seat.

� Do not apply pressure to the frontpassenger seat by resting hands orlegs on the seatback.

� Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

� Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

� Do not attach a commercial seat-back table or other heavy item tothe back of the front passengerseat.

� Child restraint systems installed onthe rear seat should not contact thefront seatbacks.

05 11.29


� When it is unavoidable to install theforward−facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Installation with seatbelt” on page 68 in this Section.)

� Do not modify or remove the frontseats.

� Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The front passenger occupantclassification indicator light may indicate“ON” (the front passenger airbag and sideairbag on the front passenger seat maydeploy) even if observing the abovecautions, when a child sits in, or aforward−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passenger seat.Refer to all the cautions in “SRS driverairbag and front passenger airbag” onpage 45, “SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags” on page 53 and “Childrestraint” on page 65.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 36 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

05 11.29

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the front passengeroccupant classification indicatorlight indicates “OFF”. In the eventof an accident, the impact of therapid inflation of the front passen-ger airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the child if the rear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the front pas-senger occupant classification indi-cator light indicates “OFF”, becausethe front passenger airbag could in-flate with considerable speed andforce. Otherwise, the child may bekilled or seriously injured.

� On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, frontor rear pillar or roof side rail fromwhich the side airbags or curtainshield airbags deploy even if thechild is seated in the child restraintsystem. It is dangerous if the sideairbag and/or curtain shield airbaginflate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. If it is not secured properly,it may cause death or serious injuryto the child in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

05 11.29


A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 78 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchoragesapproved for your vehicle may also beused. See “—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages” on page 81 inthis Section.

TS13040a

(A) Infant seat

TS13041a

(B) Convertible seat

05 11.29

—Child restraint system—Types of child restraintsystem


TS13042a

(C) Booster seat

TS13043a

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.

TS13044

CAUTION


05 11.29

—Installation with seat belt


TS13045

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

TS13046a

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.

05 11.29


TS13047a

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

TS13048a

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

TS13049a

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

05 11.29


TS13050

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

TS13051a

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward−facing or rear−facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theapplicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward−facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. If you must install the child restraintsystem on the front passenger seat,put the child restraint system puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

05 11.29


6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

The front passenger occupant classifica-tion indicator light should indicate “OFF”when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion and the child is in the child restraintsystem after following these procedures.The “OFF” indicator indicates the SRSfront passenger airbag and side airbag onthe passenger side will not deploy. If theindicator light indicates “ON”, do the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. When reinstalling a child restraint sys-tem, make sure the seatback does notpress the child restraint system intothe seat cushion. If this occurs, adjustthe seatback angle slightly.

4. Then make sure the head restraint isnot pressing the child restraint systeminto the seat cushion. If this occurs,raise the head restraint.

5. Turn the ignition on again.

The front passenger occupant classifica-tion indicator light should indicate “OFF”.If the indicator light still indicates “ON”when the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position, then the SRS front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on the passen-ger side may deploy in an accident. Donot drive the vehicle in this condition. Re-move the child restraint system and con-tact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward−facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward−facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy.

05 11.29


TS13052

CAUTION


TS13053

Move seatfully back



05 11.29


TS13054


� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

TS13055

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION



� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.

05 11.29


TS13056a

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

TS13057a

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

TS13058a

CAUTION


05 11.29


TS13059

4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

TS13060a

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward−facing position only.

TS13061

Move seatfully back

CAUTION


05 11.29



TS13062a

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 36 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s s houlder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.



05 11.29


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed. TS13059

2. To remove the booster seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract.

TS13063a

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

05 11.29

—Using a top strap


TS13064

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the rearseatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of theanchor brackets.

TS13065

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

TS13066

2. Raise the anchor bracket.

05 11.29


TS13067a

3. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

The anchor bracket is only designed tosecure the top strap. Do not use theanchor bracket for any other purpose.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 65 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

TS13068a

4. Replace the head restraint.

05 11.29


TS13069

Lower the anchor bracket when it is notin use.

TS13070

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the rear seats.

The anchorages are installed in the gapbetween the seat cushion and seatback ofboth outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

TS13071

Canada only

Type A

05 11.29

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages


TS13072

Canada only

Type B

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages near the button on theseatback.

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada— The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 78 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.


05 11.29


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt steering wheel 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirror 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 4


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window wiper and washer 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window defogger 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 5


TS15001

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker, illumination (on somemodels) and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1—The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2—The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors, backdoor and back window are closed with theignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-tion.

If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-mote control transmitter is pushed twicesimultaneously, the lights automaticallyturn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept open, the lightsautomatically turn off after 30 minutes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light (DRL) system (allmodels sold in Canada and some mod-els sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

� The ignition is on with the engine run-ning.

� The knob is in the “OFF” position orposition 1.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto position 2 or turn the ignition switch off.

05 11.29

Headlights and turn signals


TS15002

High−Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TS15003

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 309 in Section 7−3.

TS15004

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

05 11.29

Emergency flashers


NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

TS15005

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the dial.

With the dial turned fully up, the intensityof the instrument panel lights will not bereduced even when the tail lights/head-lights are turned on.

TS15006

To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors, back door and back win-dow is opened. The light goes off whenall the side doors, back door and backwindow are closed.

05 11.29

Instrument panel light control Interior light


ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch isin the “DOOR” position and any of theside doors, back door and back window isopened, the light will come on. After allthe side doors, back door and back win-dow are closed, the light remains on forabout 15 seconds before fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When theswitch is in the “DOOR” position, and theignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, thelight will come on. The light remains onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

� All the side doors, back door and backwindow are closed when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

� All the side doors, back door and backwindow are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked using either the key orthe wireless remote control transmitter, thelight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out.


� Cancelling the door key or the wirelessremote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch at the “DOOR”position for 30 minutes or more.

TS15006

To turn on the luggage compartmentlight, slide the switch.

The luggage compartment light switch hasthe following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors, back door and back win-dow is opened. The light goes off whenall the side doors, back door and backwindow are closed.

05 11.29

Luggage compartment light


ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch isin the “DOOR” position and any of theside doors, back door and back window isopened, the light will come on. After allthe side doors, back door and back win-dow are closed, the light remains on forabout 15 seconds before fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When theswitch is in the “DOOR” position, and theignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, thelight will come on. The light remains onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

� All the side doors, back door and backwindow are closed when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

� All the side doors, back door and backwindow are closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked using either the key orthe wireless remote control transmitter, thelight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out.


� Cancelling the door key or the wirelessremote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch at the “DOOR”position for 30 minutes or more.

TS15008

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The “INT” band lets you adjust the wipingtime interval when the wiper lever is inthe intermittent position (position 1). Twistthe band upward to increase the time be-tween sweeps, and downward to decreaseit.

05 11.29

Windshield wipers and washer


To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 309 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

TS15009

To turn on the back window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

In Position 1, the wiper operates 3 timesat normal speed and then moves to inter-mittent mode.

To squirt washer fluid on the back window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it. The back window wip-er operates while the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 309 inSection 7−3.

If the back window is not securely closed,the back window wiper and washer willnot work. Make sure the back window issecurely closed when using the back win-dow wiper and washer.

NOTICE

Do not operate the back window wip-er if the back window is dry. It mayscratch the glass.

05 11.29

Back window wiper andwasher


TS15010

To defog or defrost the back window,push the switch with the back windowclosed.


The thin heater wires on the inside of theback window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethe defogger is operating.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger has operated about 15minutes. But the defogger operates forMAX. 240 minutes to deal with the outsidetemperature when it is below 0�C (32�F)and the vehicle speed is 60 km/h (37mph) or faster.

Make sure you turn the defogger off whenthe surfaces are clear. Leaving the defog-gers on for a long time could cause thebattery to discharge, especially duringstop−and−go driving. The defoggers arenot designed for drying rain water or formelting snow.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the backwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

05 11.29

Back window defogger


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 6


TS16001a

Low fuel levelwarning light

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

TS16002

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

05 11.29

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge


� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

� Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 252 inSection 4.

TS16005

The voltmeter tells whether the batteryis charged or discharged. Check itwhile the engine is running—the needleshould always indicate as shown above.

If the needle reads below or above thenormal range while the engine is running,it indicates the charging system needs im-mediate repair.

However, it is normal for the needle todrop below the normal range during en-gine starting.

TS16003

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

05 11.29

Voltmeter Tachometer


NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

TS16004

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

05 11.29

Odometer and two trip meters


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)(indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Fill up tank.

05 11.29

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers



(h) Replace engine oil.

(i) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stopimmediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all side doors, back door and back window.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Stop and check.

(n) Shift four−wheel drive control out of “N”.

05 11.29



(o) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

05 11.29


(a) Brake System Warning Light andBuzzer

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

� When the hydraulic brake boosterfails...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problemresulting in poor braking performance, thewarning light comes on and buzzer soundscontinuously.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

� The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-curs, immediately stop your vehicle ata safe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

� The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

� The warning buzzer comes on to-gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate thatthe brakes may not work properlyand your stopping distance will be-come longer. Depress the brakepedal firmly and bring the vehicleto an immediate stop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-tion:

� The light may stay on for about 60seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the “ON” position. It is normal if itturns off after a while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the warning light andbuzzer. It is normal if the light turns offand the buzzer stops sounding after afew seconds.

� You may hear a small sound in theengine compartment after the engine isstarted or the brake pedal is depressedrepeatedly. This is a pump pulsatingsound of the brake system, and it isnot a malfunction.

05 11.29


(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt isnot fastened. Unless the driver fastens thebelt, the light continues flashing and thebuzzer stops after about 6 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the front passenger’sseat belt is fastened.

The second and third buzzer can be setnot to sound by following the procedurebelow.

1. Turn the ignition key to the “OFF” posi-tion with the odometer reading shown.(For details, see “Odometer and twotrip meters” on page 100 in this Sec-tion.)


3. Within 6 seconds, push the trip meterreset knob and hold it for more than10 seconds.

4. Insert the tab of driver’s seat belt intothe buckle.

5. The odometer shows either “b−on” or“b−off”. The reading changes by push-ing the trip meter reset knob and thesetting of the driver’s seat belt remind-er buzzer can be changed. The odom-eter display returns to normal if themeter reset knob has not been oper-ated for more than 10 seconds or theignition key is turned to the “OFF”position.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat BeltReminder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tohave the front passenger buckle up theseat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the driver’s seat beltis fastened.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light may flash andbuzzer to sound.

05 11.29


The buzzer can be set not to sound byfollowing the procedure below.

1. Sit on the front passenger seat.

2. Turn the ignition key to the “OFF” posi-tion with the odometer reading shown.(For details, see “Odometer and twotrip meters” on page 100 in this Sec-tion.)


4. Within 6 seconds, push the trip meterreset knob and hold it for more than10 seconds.

5. Insert the tab of front passenger seatbelt into the buckle.

6. The odometer shows either “b−on” or“b−off”. The reading changes by push-ing the trip meter reset knob and thesetting of the front passenger seat beltreminder buzzer can be changed. Theodometer display returns to normal ifthe meter reset knob has not beenoperated for more than 10 seconds orthe ignition key is turned to the “OFF”position.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” position,and goes off when the engine is started.

When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the engine is running, thewarning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the engine isrunning, malfunctions such as the en-gine drive belt being broken may haveoccurred. If the warning light comeson, immediately stop the vehicle in asafe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

05 11.29


(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

� There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions inspection and maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 284in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

05 11.29


(h) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 12 secondswith the ignition key turned to the “ON”position. If you continue driving withoutthe engine oil replacement, and if the driv-ing range exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles),the light will come on after the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position. Thelight will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad condition. If the light comes on, re-place it as soon as possible.

You need to reset the light after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the light byfollowing the procedure below:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position with the odometerreading shown. (For details, see“Odometer and two trip meters” onpage 100 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 sec-onds. The indicator light flashes and thebars displayed in the odometer disappeargradually. The odometer indicates “000000”and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willremain flashing.

(i) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), thefollowing systems do not operate, but thebrake system still operates conventionally.


� Brake assist system


� Active traction control system (four−wheel drive models with rear dif-ferential lock)

� “AUTO LSD” system(two−wheel drive models)


When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,so that the wheels will lock up during asudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

05 11.29


If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are dri-ving.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but do not indicate a malfunction:


� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itturns off after a few seconds.

� With rear differential lock: The lightcomes on with rear differential locked.At this time, the anti−lock brake sys-tem, the brake assist system, the ve-hicle stability control system, the trac-tion control system and the activetraction control system do not operate.

(j) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the following.





Four−wheel drive models, and vehicleswith rear differential lock—the “VSC OFF”indicator light will come on with the “VSCTRAC” warning light if there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey turned to “ON”, and will go off aftera few seconds.

The slip indicator light will come on withthe “VSC TRAC” warning light if there isa problem somewhere in the following.


� Active traction control system(four−wheel drive models with rear dif-ferential lock)


It is not a malfunction that the warninglight may stay on for 60 seconds after theignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the lights. It is normal if theygo out after a few seconds.

05 11.29


If the light comes on while driving, theabove mentioned systems do not work.However, as conventional braking operateswhen applied, there is no problem to con-tinue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The warning light does not come onafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

When the brake fluid level is too low, theabove mentioned systems will not operateand the warning light comes on.

(k) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors, back door and back window arecompletely closed.

(l) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS airbags and seat beltpretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system∗ and indicator light,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources.∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-tion system includes the front passengeroccupant classification ECU, load sensorand front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.




(m) Automatic Transmission FluidTemperature Warning Light(four−wheel drive models)

This light warns that the automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stopthe vehicle at a safe place and put theselector lever in “P”. With the engine id-ling, wait until the light goes off. If thelight goes off, you may start the vehicleagain. If the light does not go off, call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warninglight on may damage the automatictransmission.

05 11.29


(n) Unengaged “Park” Warning Light(four−wheel drive models)

This light warns that the transmission“Park” mechanism is not engaged. If thefour−wheel drive control lever is in the “N”position while the selector lever is in the“P” position, the transmission will disen-gage and the wheels will not lock.

CAUTION

To restore the park function, shift thefour−wheel drive control lever out of“N”, or the vehicle can move.

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to removethe key when you open the driver’s doorwith the ignition key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors, back dooror back window.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door and back window.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on.

The following service reminder indica-tors go off after a few seconds:

� Engine oil replacement reminder light

� “ABS” warning light

� “VSC TRAC” warning light

� “AUTO LSD” indicator light (two−wheel drive models)

� “VSC OFF” indicator light (four−wheel drive models, and vehicleswith rear differential lock)

� Slip indicator light

The SRS warning light goes off afterabout 6 seconds.

There may be the case that the “ABS”warning light (brake assist systemwarning light), “VSC TRAC” warninglight and “AUTO LSD” (two−wheel drivemodels), “VSC OFF” (four−wheel drivemodels, and vehicles with rear differen-tial lock) or slip indicator light stay onfor about 60 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position. Itis normal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

05 11.29


05 11.29


TS14001

To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, pull the lockrelease lever toward you, tilt the steer-ing wheel to the desired angle and re-lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-tion, it will spring up as you release thelock release lever.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

TS14002

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

05 11.29

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—


CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries. TS14003a

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

05 11.29

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol


TS14004

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

TS14005

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

05 11.29

—Folding rear view mirrorsAnti−glare inside rear viewmirror


TS14007

To use the vanity mirror, swing downthe sun visor.

05 11.29

Vanity mirror


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual transmission 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four−wheel drive system 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active traction control system 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “AUTO LSD” system 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear differential lock system 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch start cancel switch 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 7


TS17001a

“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 231 in Section3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

The selector lever must be put in the “P”position before turning the key from “ACC”to the “LOCK” position.

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engineis turned off, you may hear sound comingfrom underneath the luggage compartmentfor several minutes. This is normal opera-tion and does not indicate a malfunction.(See “Leak detection pump” on page x.)

It is not a malfunction if the needles onall meters and gauges move slightly whenthe key is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or“START” position.

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

Never remove the key when the ve-hicle is moving, as this will lock thesteering wheel and result in loss ofsteering control.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

05 11.29

Ignition switch


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and keyremoval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

05 11.29

Automatic transmission

TS17002a

With the brake pedal depressed(The ignition switch must be in“ON” position.)

Shift normally


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 232 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

Four−wheel drive models—

When the four−wheel drive control lever isin “L4” (low−speed position, four−wheeldrive), the driving pattern selector settinghas no effect on gear shift timing. (See“Four−wheel drive system (part−time four−wheel drive models)” on page 120 in thisSection for information of the four−wheeldrive control lever.)

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Two−wheel drive models—

Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low, the transmis-sion will not shift into the overdrive geareven in the “D” position.


Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low or when thefour−wheel drive control lever is in “L4”(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), thetransmission will not shift into the over-drive gear even in the “D” position. (See“Four−wheel drive system (part−time four−wheel drive models)” on page 122 in thisSection for information of the four−wheeldrive control lever.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

In normal cruising, the vehicle will start infirst gear and automatically shift up to themost suitable gear. On inclines, declinesor winding roads, etc., the vehicle shiftsup and down automatically according tothe running conditions to obtain the suit-able driving power and engine braking.

If you need to accelerate rapidly whiledriving, depress the accelerator pedal tothe full throttle position. This providesmore acceleration by automatically down-shifting the transmission to the next lowergear or beyond, depending on the vehiclespeed.

If engine braking is needed, such as indescending a long hill, see “(c) Usingengine braking”.

� AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting control

AI shifting control selects the most suit-able shift range automatically according tothe driver’s operation and driving condi-tion.

AI shifting control operates automaticallywith the selector lever in the “D” position.

Shifting control on the slope: On inclines,you can drive smoothly with reduced shift-ing quantity. On declines, the vehicle willshift down automatically to obtain optimumengine braking and reduce the driver’sfoot braking load.

Automatic shifting point change control:The automatic shifting point control is con-trolled in the following way to respond tothe driver’s operation.

05 11.29


� When the accelerator is depressedquickly, the vehicle downshifts rapidlyin order to improve acceleration.

� When the accelerator is quickly re-leased, the gear position is maintainedin order to improve engine braking andreacceleration capabilities.

� During hard deceleration the vehicledownshifts rapidly in order to improveengine braking and reacceleration capa-bilities.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Shift into the “4” position. The trans-mission will downshift to fourth gearand engine braking will be enabled.

� Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models140 km/h (87 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

Four−wheel drive control lever at“H2” and “H4”

140 km/h (87 mph)

Four−wheel drive control lever at“L4”

54 km/h (34 mph)

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models93 km/h (58 mph)



93 km/h (58 mph)


36 km/h (22 mph)

� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models

41 km/h (25 mph)



41 km/h (25 mph)


15 km/h (9 mph)

Vehicles with cruise control—When thecruise control is being used, even if youdownshift from “D” to “4”, engine brakingwill not be enabled because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 135 in thisSection.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

05 11.29


With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, thevehicle will start in first gear and automat-ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to over−rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:


“3” 148 km/h (92 mph). . . . . . . “2” 101 km/h (63 mph). . . . . . . “L” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . .


Four−wheel drive control leverat “H2” or “H4”

“3” 148 km/h (92 mph). . . . . . . “2” 101 km/h (63 mph). . . . . . . “L” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive control leverat “L4”

“3” 56 km/h (35 mph). . . . . . . . “2” 38 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 22 km/h (14 mph). . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“3”, “2” or “L” position. This maycause severe automatic transmis-sion damage from overheating. Toprevent such damage, “4” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between fourth gear andoverdrive when climbing a gentle slope,shift the selector lever to the “4” posi-tion. Be sure to shift the selector leverto the “D” position immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse “D” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

05 11.29


NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 268 in Section 4.

TS17003a

The shift pattern is conventional asshown above.

In case of driving your vehicle, the buzzerwill sound when you shift the gear into“R” (reverse).

Press the clutch pedal down fully whileshifting, and then release it slowly. Do notrest your foot on the pedal while driving,because it will cause clutch trouble. Donot use the clutch to hold the vehiclewhen stopped on an uphill grade–use theparking brake.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting toolate will cause lugging, and possibly ping-ing. Regularly revving the engine to maxi-mum speed in each gear will cause ex-cessive engine wear and high fuelconsumption.

Recommended shifting speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized andupshifting or downshifting is easy.

For the best compromise between fueleconomy and vehicle performance, youshould upshift at the following speeds:

Acceleration

gear km/h (mph)1 to 2 21 (13)2 to 3 39 (24)3 to 4 53 (33)4 to 5 66 (41)5 to 6 76 (47)

Cruise

gear km/h (mph)1 to 2 13 (8)2 to 3 23 (14)3 to 4 40 (25)4 to 5 55 (34)5 to 6 66 (41)

05 11.29

Manual transmission


Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slowertraffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-essary. Make sure you observe the follow-ing maximum allowable speeds in eachgear:

gear km/h (mph)“H” or “HL” “LL”

1 48 (30) 18 (11)2 93 (58) 35 (22)3 138 (86) 53 (33)4 172 (107) 66 (41)5 175 (109) 80 (50)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are goingfaster than the maximum allowablespeed for the next lower gear.

Good driving practice

� If it is difficult to shift into reverse, putthe transmission in neutral, release theclutch pedal momentarily, and then tryagain.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse sixth gear.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

NOTICE

� Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into reverse.

� Do not use any gears other thanfirst gear when starting off andmoving forward. Doing so may dam-age the clutch.

TS17005

Use the four−wheel drive control leverto select the following transfer modes.

“H” (high speed position): Lever at “H”Use this for normal driving on dry hard−surfaced roads. This position gives greatereconomy, quietest ride and least wear.

“HL” (high speed position, center differ-ential locked): Lever at “HL”Use this for normal driving on wet, icy orsnow−covered roads.

“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N”No power is delivered to the wheels. Thevehicle must be stopped.

05 11.29

Four−wheel drive system(full−time four−wheel drivemodels)—(a) Four−wheel drive control


“LL” (low speed position, center differ-ential locked): Lever at “LL”Use this for maximum power and traction.Use “LL” for climbing or descending steephills, off−road driving, and hard pulling insand, mud or deep snow.

The center differential lock indicator lightcomes on when the “LL” or “HL” mode isselected.

See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-structions.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H” AND “HL”

To shift from “H” to “HL”, move thefour−wheel drive control lever.

This can be done at any vehicle speed.You need not depress the clutch pedal. Ifthe indicator light does not come on whenyou shift the transfer into “HL”, drivestraight ahead while accelerating or decel-erating.

CAUTION

Never move the four−wheel drive con-trol lever if wheels are slipping. Stopthe slipping or spinning before shift-ing.

To shift from “HL” to “H”, simply movethe four−wheel drive control lever.

This can be done at any vehicle speed.You need not depress the clutch pedal.

If the indicator light does not go off whenyou shift the transfer into “H”, drivestraight ahead while accelerating or decel-erating, or drive in reverse.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “HL” AND “LL”

To shift from “HL” to “LL”, stop thevehicle or reduce your speed to less than8 km/h (5 mph). With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, depress the clutch ped-al and move the four−wheel drive controllever.

To shift from “LL” to “HL”, depress theclutch pedal and move the four−wheeldrive control lever.

This can be done at any vehicle speed.

05 11.29

(b) Shifting procedure


TS17004

Use the front drive control lever to se-lect the following transfer modes.

“H2” (high speed position, two−wheeldrive): Lever at “H2”Use this for normal driving on dry hard−surfaced roads. This position gives greatereconomy, quietest ride and least wear.

“H4” (high speed position, four−wheeldrive): Lever at “H4”Use this for normal driving on wet, icy orsnow−covered roads. This position pro-vides greater traction than two−wheeldrive.

“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N”No power is delivered to the wheels. Thevehicle must be stopped.

“L4” (low speed position, four−wheeldrive): Lever at “L4”Use this for maximum power and traction.Use “L4” for climbing or descending steephills, off−road driving, and hard pulling insand, mud or deep snow.

The four−wheel drive indicator light comeson when the “H4”, “N” or “L4” mode isselected.

See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in-structions.

The A.D.D. (automatic disconnecting dif-ferential) can be engaged or disengagedby the shifting operations described in“(c) Shifting procedure”.

You should drive in four−wheel drive forat least 16 km (10 miles) each month.This will assure that the front drive com-ponents are lubricated.

05 11.29

Four−wheel drive system (part−timefour−wheel drive models)—(a) Front drive control (b) A.D.D.


SHIFTING BETWEEN “H2” AND “H4”

To shift from “H2” to “H4” , reduce yourspeed to less than 80 km/h (50 mph) andmove the front drive control lever.

If you have trouble shifting in cold weath-er, reduce your speed or stop the vehicleand reshift.

CAUTION

Never move the front drive controllever if wheels are slipping. Stop theslipping or spinning before shifting.

To shift from “H4” to “H2”, simply movethe front drive control lever.

This can be done at any vehicle speed.

If the indicator light does not go off whenyou shift the transfer into “H2”, drivestraight ahead while accelerating or decel-erating, or drive in reverse.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”

Stop the vehicle, put the transmission into“N” and move the front drive control lever.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of rearwheels (two−wheel drive models) or 4wheels (four−wheel drive models) whenthe vehicle is started or accelerated onslippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower to the rear wheels (two−wheeldrive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheeldrive models) cannot be maintained,even though the traction control sys-tem is in operation. Do not drive thevehicle under any speed or maneuver-ing conditions which may cause thevehicle to lose traction control. In si-tuations where the road surface iscovered with ice or snow, your ve-hicle should be fitted with snow tiresor tire chains. Always drive at an ap-propriate and cautious speed for thepresent road conditions.

TS17007

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the trac-tion control system is in the self−checkmode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

05 11.29

(c) Shifting procedure Traction control system


� The system controls the spinning of therear wheels (two−wheel drive models)or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models).At this time, the slip indicator lightblinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increasesduring continuous operation of the tractioncontrol system and the “AUTO LSD” sys-tem such as on slippery roads. If thebrake actuator temperature becomes toohigh while any of the systems is operat-ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-tently to indicate that the traction controlsystem can no longer operate. In thiscase, immediately stop your vehicle at asafe place.

If the system continues to operate, thebuzzer sound changes from intermittent tocontinuous. (The continuous buzzersounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the slip indicator light willcome on and the traction control systemtemporarily stops operating in order toprotect the brake actuator. (Although thetraction control system does not operate,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.) The system will be automatically re-stored after a short time and the slip indi-cator light goes out.

With rear differential lock: However, it isa normal operation for the light to be onwith rear differential locked. At this time,the traction control system does not oper-ate.

TS17008

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the following.


� Active traction control system (four−wheel drive models with rear differentiallock)



When the system is normal and the igni-tion key is turned to “ON”, the “VSCTRAC” warning light will come on and willgo off after a few seconds.

05 11.29


It is not a malfunction that the warninglight may stay on for 60 seconds after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itgoes out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slipindicator light come on while driving, thetraction control system does not work.However, as normal braking operateswhen being applied, there is no problemto continue your driving.





The active traction control system auto-matically helps prevent the spinning of4 wheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower to the 4 wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

TS17015

To activate the system, push the activetraction control switch and shift thefour−wheel drive control lever into “L4”(part−time four−wheel drive models) or“LL” (full−time four−wheel drive mod-els). At this time, the active tractioncontrol system indicator light will comeon.

To cancel the system, push the activetraction control switch once again.

05 11.29

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models withrear differential lock)


TS17007

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the ac-tive traction control system is in the self−check mode, but does not indicate a mal-function.

When the active traction control system isoperating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of the4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-tor light blinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.


The brake actuator temperature increasesduring continuous operation of the activetraction control system such as on slip-pery roads. If the brake actuator tempera-ture becomes too high while any of thesystems is operating, a buzzer will startto sound intermittently to indicate that theactive traction control system can no lon-ger operate. In this case, immediately stopyour vehicle at a safe place.


At the time, the slip indicator light willcome on and the active traction controlsystem temporarily stops operating in or-der to protect the brake actuator. (Al-though the active traction control systemdoes not operate, there is no problem tocontinue your driving.) The system will beautomatically restored after a short timeand the slip indicator light goes out. How-ever, it is a normal operation for the lightto be on with rear differential locked. Atthis time, the active traction control sys-tem does not operate.

05 11.29


TS17008




� Active traction control system



It is not a malfunction that the “VSCTRAC” warning light may stay on for 60seconds after the ignition key is turned to“ON”.


If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slipindicator light come on while driving, theactive traction control system does notwork. However, as normal braking oper-ates when being applied, there is no prob-lem to continue your driving.





TS17009

The “AUTO LSD” system aids tractionby using the traction control system tocontrol engine performance and brakingwhen one of the rear wheels begins tospin.

This system should be used only whenwheel spinning occurs in a ditch orrough surface.

This system is effective in case one ofthe rear wheels is spinning.

05 11.29

“AUTO LSD” system(two−wheel drive models)


NOTICE

Do not use the “AUTO LSD” systemin conditions other than the above. Amuch greater steering effort and morecareful cornering control will be re-quired. TS17010

To turn on the system, push the “AUTOLSD” switch when the vehicle isstopped.

The “AUTO LSD” system is activatedwhen driving at a speed under 100km/h (62 mph). At this time, the “AUTOLSD” indicator light will come on.

To turn off the system, push the “AUTOLSD” switch again.

If the engine is turned off while the“AUTO LSD” indicator light is on and thenrestarted, the indicator light will turn offautomatically.

TS17011

Make sure the “AUTO LSD” indicator lightcomes on under the above condition whenyou use the “AUTO LSD” system.

The slip indicator light blinks when thesystem is controlling the spinning of therear wheels.

The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lightscome on for a few seconds when theignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indi-cator lights does not come on when theignition key is turned to “ON”, contactyour Toyota dealer.

05 11.29


The brake actuator temperature increasesduring continuous operation of the “AUTOLSD” system and the traction control sys-tem such as on slippery roads. If thebrake actuator temperature becomes toohigh while any of the systems is operat-ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-tently to indicate that the “AUTO LSD”system can no longer operate. In thiscase, immediately stop your vehicle at asafe place.


At the time the slip indicator light willcome on and the “AUTO LSD” systemtemporarily stops operating in order toprotect the brake actuator. (Although the“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, itis no problem to continue driving.) Thesystem will be automatically restored aftera short time and the slip indicator lightgoes off.

TS17008



� “AUTO LSD” system




It is not a malfunction that the warninglight may stay on for 60 seconds after theignition key is turned to “ON”.


If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slipindicator light comes on while driving, the“AUTO LSD” system does not work. How-ever, as the brakes operate normally whenapplied, it is no problem to continue yourdriving.





NOTICE

Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD”switch continuously turned on.

05 11.29


The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as anti−lock brake sys-tem, traction control, engine control,etc. This system automatically controlsthe output of the brakes or engine tohelp prevent the vehicle from skiddingwhen cornering on a slippery road sur-face or operating steering wheel abrupt-ly.

The vehicle stability control system is acti-vated when the vehicle speed is morethan 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the sys-tem is in the self−check mode, but doesnot indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid serious injury. Reckless driv-ing will result in an unexpected ac-cident. If the slip indicator lightblinks and an alarm sounds, specialcare should be taken while driving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 299 in Section 7−2.)

TS17007

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.

If the brake pedal is depressed while thevehicle stability control system is active,the brake pedal will become hard at anearlier position than usual. However, thebrakes will respond to the pedal force ifdepressed further.


05 11.29

Vehicle stability controlsystem


TS17018

The vehicle stability control system au-tomatically turns off, and the “VSCOFF” indicator light is illuminated,when either one of the following condi-tions applies:

� The transfer is set into “HL” or “LL”position. (full−time four−wheel drivemodels)

� The transfer is set into “H4” or “L4”position. (part−time four−wheel drivemodels)

� The rear differential is locked. (vehicleswith rear differential lock)

The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes onfor a few seconds when the ignition keyis turned to “ON”, and then turns off. Ifeither one of the above conditions applies,the indicator light is illuminated again.

The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes onfor a few seconds when the ignition keyis turned to “ON”. It will come on againwhen you push the center differential lockswitch to turn off the system.


� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned to“ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The indicator light comes on when thesystem is on while driving.

TS17008





� Active traction control system(four−wheel drive models with rear dif-ferential lock)


05 11.29


The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”. Itis normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if theygo out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” waning light comes onwhile driving, the vehicle stability controlsystem does not work. However, as nor-mal braking operates when being applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.





Four−wheel drive models, and the vehicleswith rear differential lock—The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes onwhen the “VSC TRAC” warning lightcomes on, even when the four−wheeldrive control lever is in the “H” (full−timefour−wheel drive models) or “H2” (part−time four−wheel drive models) or the reardifferential is unlocked.

TS17009

The rear differential lock system is pro-vided for use only when wheel spinningoccurs in a ditch or on a slippery orragged surface.

This differential lock system is effective incase one of the rear wheels is spinning.

Full−time four−wheel drive models—Before using the rear differential lock sys-tem, first shift the four−wheel drive controllever into “LL” to see if this is sufficient.If this has no effect, additionally use therear differential lock system.

05 11.29

Rear differential lock system


Part−time four−wheel drive models—Before using the rear differential lock sys-tem, first shift the four−wheel drive controllever into “L4” to see if this is sufficient.If this has no effect, additionally use therear differential lock system.

CAUTION

Do not use the rear differential lockin the conditions other than above.Large steering effort and careful cor-nering control will be required.

TS17016

To lock the rear differential, push theswitch.

Be sure to stop the wheels before lockingthe differential.

For easy locking on vehicle with manualtransmission, depress the clutch pedal,push the lock switch and slowly releasethe clutch pedal. On vehicle with automat-ic transmission, push the lock switch andgently depress the accelerator pedal.

The indicator light will blink when theswitch is turned on. Wait a few secondsfor the system to complete operation. Af-ter the differential is locked, the light willstop blinking and remain on.

The following systems do not operatewhen the rear differential is locked. It isnormal operation for the “ABS” warninglight, “VSC OFF” indicator light and slipindicator light to be on at this time.





� Active traction control system (four−wheel drive models)

CAUTION

� Do not lock the differential until thewheels have stopped spinning.Otherwise, the vehicle may move inan unexpected direction when thedifferential lock is engaged, result-ing in an accident. This may alsolead to possible damage to differen-tial lock component parts.

� Do not drive over 8 km/h (5 mph)when the differential is locked.

05 11.29


To unlock the differential, push theswitch once again.

Unlock the differential as soon as the ve-hicle moves out.

For easy unlocking, slightly turn the steer-ing wheel in either direction while the ve-hicle is in motion.

When the differential lock is disengaged,the indicator light will go out.

Full−time four−wheel drive models—The differential will also unlock if you shiftthe four−wheel drive control lever to the“H” or “HL” position. Never forget to turnoff the switch after using this feature.

Part−time four−wheel drive models—The rear differential will also unlock if youshift the four−wheel drive control lever tothe “H2” or “H4” position. Never forget toturn off the switch after using this feature.

To check the indicator bulb, turn the igni-tion key to the “ON” position, but do notstart the engine.

CAUTION

Do not keep driving with the differen-tial lock switch on.

TS17012

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-ing power, first depress the brake pedaland hold it while setting the parkingbrake.To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),press the thumb button (2), and lower (3).

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

05 11.29

Parking brake


The cruise control is designed to main-tain a set cruising speed without requir-ing the driver to operate the accelera-tor. Cruising speed can be set to anyspeed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-ties, cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades. However, changes in ve-hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TS17013

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicatorlight on the instrument panel will come onto indicate that the cruise control is opera-tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” buttonagain turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruisingspeed must be reset when the cruise con-trol is turned on again.

CAUTION

Due to the cruise control switch be-ing located just behind the steeringwheel, there is a possibility that itmay be touched accidentally. To avoidaccidentally engaging the cruise con-trol, turn the system off when it isnot in use. Make sure the “CRUISE”indicator light is off.

05 11.29

Cruise control


TS17014

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

On vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission must be in “D” or “4”before you set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

While driving with the cruise controlon, do not shift to neutral withoutdepressing the clutch pedal, as thismay cause engine racing or overrev-ving.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarilycancelled by the driver or by the systemitself under certain circumstances. Tempo-rary cancellation allows the set cruisingspeed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can-celled by doing the following:

� Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-rection and releasing it

� Depressing the brake pedal

� Depressing the clutch pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruisecontrol is temporarily cancelled:

� When vehicle speed falls below 40km/h (25 mph)

� When vehicle stability control is acti-vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-trol is cancelled and the set speed iserased from memory.

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains onto indicate that the system is still in op-eration.

To turn the cruise control off, press the“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can-celled, the cruising speed can be resumedby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25mph).

05 11.29


RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

On vehicles with automatic transmission,even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, withthe cruise control on, engine braking willnot be enabled because the cruise controlis not cancelled. To decrease the vehiclespeed, reset to a slower speed with thecruise control lever or depress the brakepedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruisecontrol is cancelled.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flasheswhen using the cruise control, press the“ON−OFF” button to turn the system offand then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.

TS17019

To crank the engine without depressingthe clutch pedal, push the switch withthe ignition on.

The switch stays on as long as the igni-tion is on. And it will automatically turn offwhen the ignition is off. An indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate the system isoperating.

This switch cancels the clutch start sys-tem, which is designed to keep the startermotor from operating if the clutch pedal isnot depressed all the way down.

The switch allows the vehicle to be drivenout of difficult situations by cranking theengine with the clutch engaged.

05 11.29

Clutch start cancel switch


Never use the switch for normal enginestarting. Be sure to follow the startingprocedure instructed in “How to start theengine” on page 232 in Section 3.

05 11.29


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio systemReference 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display color change function 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX adapter 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub woofer 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system operating hints 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 8


PS18502

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player/MP3/WMA player (with compact discchanger controller)

TS18001a

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc playerwith changer/MP3/WMA player (with XM �

satellite radio ∗ controller)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�

tuner and service. Contact your Toyotadealer for details.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Welcome function (type 2)

When you turn the ignition switch to the“ACC” or “ON” position, “FJ CRUISER”will appear scrolling on the display. Andthen “FJammer” will appear for 6 seconds.

While this function is operating, the dis-play is illuminated with full intensity andthe instrument panel light control dial isdisabled. However, you can turn off thedisplay illumination by pushing the“PWR·VOL” knob.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “AM·SAT”∗ or“DISC·AUX” to turn on that function with-out pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on thecompact disc player, a compact disc mustbe loaded in the player.

You can turn on the compact disc playerby inserting a compact disc.

ReferenceUsing your audio system——Some basics


You can turn off the compact disc playerby ejecting the compact disc. If the audiosystem was previously off, then the entireaudio system will be turned off when youeject the compact disc. If another functionwas previously playing, it will come onagain.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “AM·SAT”∗ or“DISC·AUX” if the system is already onbut you want to switch from one functionto another.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


LISTENING TO THE XM� SATELLITERADIO BROADCAST ∗ (type 2)

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inyour vehicle, an additional genuine Toyotasatellite receiver and antenna must bepurchased and installed. A subscription tothe XM� satellite radio service is alsonecessary.

How to subscribe to an XM � satelliteradio

An XM� satellite radio is a tuner designedexclusively to receive broadcasts providedunder a separate subscription. Availabilityis limited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe:You must enter into a separate serviceagreement with the XM� radio in order toreceive satellite broadcast programming inthe vehicle. Additional activation and ser-vice subscription fees apply that are notincluded in the purchase price of the ve-hicle and optional digital satellite tuner.For complete information on subscriptionrates and terms, or to subscribe to theXM� radio, visit XM� on the web atwww.xmradio.com or call an XM�’s Listen-er Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM� radiois solely responsible for the quality, avail-ability and content of the satellite radioservices provided, which are subject tothe terms and conditions of the XM� radiocustomer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “channel 000” on the radio. Fordetails, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-low.

All fees and programming are the respon-sibility of the XM� satellite radio and aresubject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice: Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awardedType Approval Certificates from XM� Sat-ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibilitywith the services offered by the XM� sat-ellite radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XM� tuner is identified with a uniqueradio ID. You will need the radio ID whenactivating XM� service or when reportinga problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the“TUNE/FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-phanumeric characters appears. If you se-lect another channel, display of the IDcode is canceled. The channel (000) alter-nates the display between the radio IDand the specific radio ID code.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�



TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

SRS �

Type 1 and 2 audio systems utilize SRSFOCUS� and SRS TruBass� audioenhancement technologies, under licensefrom SRS Labs, Inc., in all mode exceptAM radio mode.

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol aretrademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.FOCUS and TruBass technologies areincorporated under license from SRSLabs, Inc.

This vehicle incorporates NXT flat panelspeaker technology by New TransducersLimited, UK. is a registeredtrademarks of New Transducers Limited.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble and bass levels. In fact, differ-ent kinds of music and vocal programsusually sound better with different mixesof treble and bass.

The tones set in each function are storedin the memory.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

To remove the antenna, carefully turn itcounterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.


YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. The compact discplayer will play from track 1 through tothe end of the disc. Then it will play fromtrack 1 again.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. This compact disc play-er can store up to six discs. The playerwill play from track 1 through to the endof the disc. Then it will play from track1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

TS18002

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc player. Insert onlyone compact disc into slot at atime.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a com-pact disc into the slot.

YOUR MP3/WMA PLAYER

The MP3/WMA file specifications or mediaformats which you MP3/WMA player canoperate are limited. For details, see page166.


—Controls and features�Type 1


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button toeject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast−forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balancecontrols)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”knob, the mode changes. To adjust thetone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

PS18505


DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play acompact disc.

When the audio system is set to compactdisc operation, the display shows thetrack number currently being played.

To switch between CD and AUX (externaldevice) modes, press the “DISC·AUX”button. The AUX mode is only availablewhen AUX adapter is connected to thesystem. When you push the “DISC·AUX”button, “AUX” will appear on the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofthe separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of the separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMAdata has been inserted. Remove the discfrom the player and insert an MP3/WMAdata disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn onthe radio and select the FM band. “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display. Thissystem allows you to set twelve FM sta-tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:Push either side of the “FOLDER” severaltimes until the number of the folder youwant to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the currentfolder:Push and hold the “�” side of the buttonuntil you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audiodata (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audiodata (CD−DA) is played.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.


RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—you can either listen to all of the files onthe compact discs in random order. Youcan also listen to the files in a singlefolder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To randomly play all of the files on thecompact disc:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willplay all of the files on the disc in randomorder. To turn off the random playbackfeature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.


MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—You canrepeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the file is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe file ends, it will repeat automatically.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

Repeating a folder:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall of the files in the folder. When the lastfile in the folder ends, the folder will re-peat from the beginning. To turn off therepeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack on the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.


MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-ic disc or scan the first file of all thefolder.

Scanning the files on a folder:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the files in the folder you arelistening to. To select a file, push the“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on thedisc have been scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ” will appear on the display andthe player will scan the first file of thenext folder. To select a folder, push the“SCAN” again. After all the folders havebeen scanned in one pass, normal playresumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:Push either side of the “TRACK” severaltimes until the file you want to listen toappears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the current file,push the “�” side of the button one time,quickly.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.


If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the displayfor the MP3/WMA file that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while theMP3/WMA file is playing. The displaychanges in the order from the elapsedtime to folder name to file name to albumtitle to track title to artist name, then backto the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while anMP3/WMA file that does not contain textdata is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear onthe display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,push and hold it until you hear a beep.The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up thefrequency. Turn the knob counterclockwiseto step down the frequency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turnthe knob counterclockwise to file down.


�Type 2


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE/FILE” or“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM·SAT”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

XM� satellite radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune inthe desired channel. (See “TUNE/FILE” or“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe channel to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-ton for the channel you want. The presetbutton number and channel number willappear on the display.

This radio can store three XM� channelsfor each button. (The display will show“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push“AM·SAT” button.)∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” (presetbutton 3) or “�” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.

TS18003a


(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast−forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM·SAT (AM band and XM � satellite ra-dio ∗)

Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on theradio and select the AM or XM� band.“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,your audio system will display followingerror messages.

“ANTENNA”:

� The XM� antenna is not connected.Check whether the XM� antenna cableis attached securely.

� A short−circuit occurs in the antenna orthe surrounding antenna cable. See aToyota certified dealer.

“UPDATING”:

� You have not subscribed to the XM�

satellite radio. The radio is being up-dated with the latest encryption code.Contact the XM� satellite radio for sub-scription information. When a contractis canceled, you can choose the“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

� The premium channel you selected isnot authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the pre-vious channel or “CH001”. If it doesnot change automatically, select anoth-er channel. If you want to listen to thepremium channel, contact the XM� sat-ellite radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XM� signal is tooweak at the current location. Wait untilyour vehicle reaches a location with astronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audioor program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected isnot broadcasting any programming. Selectanother channel.

“− − −”: The channel you selected is nolonger available. Wait for about 2 secondsuntil the radio returns to the previouschannel or “CH001”. If it does not changeautomatically, select another channel.

The XM� Listener Care Center is alsoavailable on the phone, please call (800)967−2346 during the following hours:Monday—Saturday: 7 a.m.—1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m.—12 a.m.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


AUDIO CTRL (Tone and sound balancecontrols)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CTRL”knob, the mode changes. To adjust thetone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.


DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play acompact disc.

When the audio system is set to compactdisc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

To switch between CD and AUX (externaldevice) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-ton. The AUX mode is only available whenAUX adapter is connected to the system.When you push the “DISC·AUX” button,“AUX” will appear on the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofthe separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of the separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMAdata has been inserted. Remove the discfrom the player and insert an MP3/WMAdata disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn onthe radio and select the FM band. “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display. Thissystem allows you to set twelve FM sta-tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:Push either side of the “FOLDER” severaltimes until the number of the folder youwant to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the currentfolder:Push and hold the “�” side of the buttonuntil you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audiodata (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audiodata (CD−DA) is played.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.


To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on), then insertthe first compact disc. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will close.After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-matically open again so the next disc canbe inserted. The same process can beapplied for loading the rest of the discs.If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—you can either listen to all of the files onthe compact discs in random order. Youcan also listen to the files in a singlefolder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To randomly play all of the files on thecompact disc:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willplay all of the files on the disc in randomorder. To turn off the random playbackfeature, push this button again.


RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—You canrepeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the file is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe file ends, it will repeat automatically.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

Repeating a folder:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall of the files in the folder. When the lastfile in the folder ends, the folder will re-peat from the beginning. To turn off therepeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.


You can either scan the currently selectedchannel category or scan only the presetchannels for that band.


To scan the preset channels:Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on thedisplay. The radio will tune in the nextpreset channel up the band, stay there for5 seconds, and then move to the nextpreset channel. To stop scanning, pushthis button again.

To scan the currently selected channelcategory:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. Theradio will find the next channel in thesame channel category up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then scan again.To stop scanning, push this button again.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack on the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-ic disc or scan the first file of all thefolder.

Scanning the files on a folder:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the files in the folder you arelistening to. To select a file, push the“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on thedisc have been scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ” will appear on the display andthe player will scan the first file of thenext folder. To select a folder, push the“SCAN” again. After all the folders havebeen scanned in one pass, normal playresumes.


SEEK·TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button. Do this again tofind the station after that.


To select the next channel within the cur-rent channel category, push the “�” or“�” side of the “SEEK·TRACK” button.Repeat until a desired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button until the number ofthe track you want to listen to appears onthe display. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, quicklypush the down side of the button onetime.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:Push either side of the “SEEK·TRACK”several times until the file you want tolisten to appears on the display. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent file, push the “�” side of the but-ton one time, quickly.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TEXT

XM� satellite radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, thedisplay changes as follows: CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAMTITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can bedisplayed. (Some information will not befully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.

If there is no song/program title or artistname/feature associated with the channelat that time, “− − − − −” will appear on thedisplay.

This XM� tuner supports “Audio Services”(Music and Talk) of only XM� satellite ra-dio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to therespective audio services.∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


∗2: Text Information includes, ChannelName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.


Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the displayfor the MP3/WMA file that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while theMP3/WMA file is playing. The displaychanges in the order from the elapsedtime to folder name to file name to albumtitle to track title to artist name, then backto the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while anMP3/WMA file that does not contain textdata is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear onthe display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,push and hold it until you hear a beep.The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE/FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up thefrequency. Turn the knob counterclockwiseto step down the frequency.


Turn the “TUNE/FILE” knob clockwise tostep up the channel. Turn the knob coun-terclockwise to step down the channel.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turnthe knob counterclockwise to file down.

TYPE


When you push the “�” or “�” side ofthe “TYPE” button while receiving a XM�

channel, the current channel category ap-pears on the display.

When the channel category appears, pusheither “�” or “�” side of the “TYPE” but-ton to switch to the next or previous cate-gory.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�



You can change the display color byfollowing the procedure below.

1. Select the function of which you wantto change the display color.

2. Turn the audio system off by pushingthe “PWR·VOL” knob.

3. Push the “TEXT” button for more than5 seconds. “TEXT MODE” will appearon the display, and then the system isturned off.

4. Turn the system on.

5. Change the display color by turning the“AUDIO CTRL” knob. When you turnthe knob, the display color changes asfollows:Amber � Yellow � Yellowgreen �

Green � Turquoiseblue � Blue �

Purple � Magenta � Red � Amber

6. Set the display color by pushing the“AUDIO CTRL” knob briefly. The nameof the function of which the color waschanged will appear on the display.

If you want to set that display color forall the function displays, push the knobfor 2 seconds. “ALL CHANGE” will ap-pear on the display.

To continue to change the display colorof other functions, select the functionof which you want to change the dis-play color, and repeat steps 5 to 6.

7. Turn the system off by pushing the“PWR·VOL” knob. The display colorchange function ends. TS11004b

Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “��” switch


Display color change function(type 2 only)

Audio remote controls(steering switches)


1. Volume control switches

Push the “+” side to increase the volume.The volume continues to increase whilethe switch is being pushed.

Push the “−” side to decrease the volume.The volume continues to decrease whilethe switch is being pushed.

2. “ � �” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, pushand hold the switch even after you heara beep. When you release the switch, theradio will begin seeking up or down for astation. Do this again to find the nextstation.


To select a preset channel, push the “�”or “�” side of the switch. Repeat until adesired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.


Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.

MP3/WMA player

Use this switch to select a desired file ordisc.

To select a desired file:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the file you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current file, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.

To select a desired disc:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.


Push the “MODE” switch to select an au-dio mode. Each push changes the modesequentially if the desired mode is readyto use.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.


TS18005a

An AUX adapter is installed on the in-strument panel.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUXadapter, you can listen to music from aportable audio device through the vehicle’sspeaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to theAUX mode (external device mode) bypressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When theAUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appearon the display. To adjust the volume, turnthe “PWR·VOL” knob.

If you install an audio system other thana genuine audio system, you will not beable to use the AUX adapter.

TS18008

To operate the sub woofer, push thesub woofer on−off switch.

To stop it, push the switch again.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video systemoperation:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� Do not put anything other than acompact disc into the slot.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

AUX adapter Sub woofer (on some models) Audio system operating hints


For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

XM�∗

Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-its are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interfer-ence in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio commu-nications. However, there is no guar-antee that interference will not occurin a particular installation.


If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correctthe interference by one or more ofthe following measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receivingantenna.

—Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an out-let on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experi-enced radio/TV technician for help.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

TS18009

Compact disc player

� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

Copy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM


Z17038

Special shaped discs

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

Z17039

Low quality discs

Z17037

Labeled discs

NOTICE

� Do not use special shaped, trans-parent/translucent, low quality or la-beled discs such as those shown inthe illustrations. The use of suchdiscs may damage the player orchanger, or it may be impossible toeject the disc.

� This system is not designed for useof dual discs. Do not use dualdiscs because it may cause damageto the player or changer.


Z17052

Correct Wrong

� Handle the discs carefully, especiallywhen you are inserting them. Holdthem on the edge and do not bendthem. Avoid getting fingerprints onthem, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa chapter or track. (To see a pin hole,hold the disc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not playing them.Store them in their plastic cases awayfrom moisture, heat, and direct sun-light.

Z17053

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened withwater. Wipe in a straight line from thecenter to the edge of the disc (not incircles). Dry it with another soft, lint−freecloth. Do not use a conventional recordcleaner or anti−static device.

MP3/WMA FILES

� MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3and refers to an audio compressiontechnology standard.

� WMA is short for Windows MediaTM

Audio. WMA is able to compress audiodata to about 1/2 the level of MP3.

� The MP3/WMA player allows playbackof MP3/WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−Rand CD−RW discs.

Disc recordings compatible with level 1and level 2 of ISO 9660 and with theRomeo and Joliet file system can beplayed back.

� When naming a MP3/WMA file, add thecorresponding filename extension(.mp3/.wma).

� The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith the file name extension(.mp3/.wma) as an MP3/WMA file. Toprevent noise and malfunctions, do notuse this extension for files other thanMP3/WMA files.


� It is possible to play back multi−ses-sion compatible recorded discs.

� When playing discs with MP3/WMAfiles and audio data (CD−DA) such asCD−EXTRA and MIXED−MODE CD,CD−DA only can be played.

� Files are compatible with the ID3 TagVer. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3formats for display of album (disc title),track (track title) and artist (track art-ist).

� Files are compatible with the WMA Tagfor display of track (track title) andartist (track artist).

� Only when MP3/WMA files of 32, 44.1and 48 kHz frequencies are playedback, the emphasis function is valid.(MP3 files: 16, 22.05, 24 kHz samplingfrequencies can be played back.)

� The sound quality of MP3/WMA filesgenerally becomes better with higherbit rates. This product can play record-ings with bit rates as follows:

MP3 files: 64 kbps to 320 kbpsWMA files: 48 kbps to 320 kbps

But in order to be able to enjoy acertain sound quality, it is recom-mended to use only discs recordedwith a bit rate of at least 128 kbps.

� The MP3/WMA player does not playback MP3/WMA files from discs record-er using packet write data transfer(UDF format). Discs should be re-corded using “pre−mastering” softwarerather than packet−write software.

� There is no m3u playlist compatibility.

� There is no compatibility with the MP3i(MP3 interactive) or mp3PRO format.

� The MP3/WMA player is compatiblewith VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

� When playing back files recorded asVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the playtime will not be correctly displayed iffast−forward or reverse operations areused.

� It is not possible to check folders thatdo not include MP3/WMA files.

� MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folderscan be played back. However, there isa delay in the start of playback ondiscs with numerous tiers. For this rea-son we recommend creating discs withno more than 2 tiers.

� It is possible to play back up to 255files on one disc.

� It is possible to play back up to 192folders on one disc.


18i023

001

002 003 004 005

006

007

008

009

010

011

Folder 1

Folder 3

Folder

Folder 4

Folder 6

Folder 7

Folder 8

Folder 2

Folder 5

: MP3/WMA file

� The turn of play of the compact dischaving the structure shown on the leftis as follows:

001 002 . . . 011

� The order changes depending on thePC and MP3/WMA encoding softwareyou use.

CD−R and CD−RW discs

� CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (aprocess that allows them to be playedback on a conventional CD player)cannot be played back.

� It may not be possible to play backCD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a mu-sic CD recorder or a personal comput-er because of disc characteristics,scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,condensation, etc. on the lens of thisunit.

� Playback of discs recorded on a per-sonal computer may not be possibledepending on the application settingsand the environment. Record with thecorrect format. (For details, contact themanufacturer of the applications.)

� Playback of CD−R/CD−RW discs maybecome impossible in case of directexposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures, or the storage conditions in thevehicle.

� Titles and other text information re-corded on a CD−R/CD−RW disc maynot be displayed by the MP3/WMAplayer (in the case of audio data (CD−DA)).


� The MP3/WMA player conforms to thetrack skip function of the CD−R/CD−RW disc.

� If you insert a CD−RW disc into theMP3/WMA player, load time to play-back will be longer than for a conven-tional CD or CD−R disc.

� Read the precautions accompanyingthe CD−R/CD−RW discs before use.

� Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannotbe played back using the DDCD(Double Density CD) system.

TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term for a method ofwriting on CD−R, etc. at the time requiredfor a file, just as is done with files onfloppy or hard discs.

Bit rate—

This expresses data volume per second,or bps units (bits per second). The higherthe rate, the more information is availableto reproduce the sound. Using the sameencoding methods (such as MP3/WMA),the higher the rate, the better the sound.

Multi−session—

Multi−session is a recording method thatallows additional data to be recorded later.When recording data on a CD−ROM,CD−R or CD−RW, etc., all data from be-ginning to end is treated as a single unitor session. Multi−session is a method ofrecording more than 2 sessions in onedisc.

CD−DA—

CD−DA is an abbreviation of CompactDisc Digital Audio. It refers to the uncom-pressed format of regular CDs.

ID3 Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-lated information in an MP3 file. This em-bedded information can include the tracktitle, the artist’s name, the album title, themusic genre, the year of production, com-ments and other data. The contents canbe freely edited using software with ID3tag editing functions. Although the tagsare restricted to the number of characters,the information can be viewed when thetrack is played back.

WMA Tag—

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag.WMA tags carry information such as tracktitle, artist name.

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for theformat logic of CD−ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are regula-tions for the following two levels.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (the nameconsists of up to 8 characters, half−byteEnglish capital letters and half−byte nu-merals and the “−” sign, with a file exten-sion of three characters.)


Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 (MP3files)/15 (WMA files) characters (includingthe separation mark “.” and a file exten-sion). Each folder contains less than 8hierarchies.

Extended formats

Joliet:

File name can have up to 64 characters.

Romeo:

File names can have up to 128 charac-ters.

m3u—

Playlists created using the “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is short for MPEG 1 & 2 Audio Layer3. It is an audio compression standard setby a working group (MPEG) of the ISO(International Standards Organization).MP3 is able to compress audio data toabout 1/10 the level of a conventionaldisc.

WMA—

WMA is short for Windows MediaTM Audio.It is the audio file format developed byMicrosoft Corporation. WMA is able tocompress audio data to about 1/2 the lev-el of MP3. The decoding formats for WMAfiles are Ver7, 8, and 9.

Windows MediaTM and Windows� are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion in the United States and other coun-tries.


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemControls 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side vents 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 9


1. Air intake selector

2. “A/C” button

3. Air flow selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Fan speed selector

05 11.29

Controls

TS19001


Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

G18021

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level— Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging/defrosting function with thepurpose of clearing the windshield.

In this position, air intake selectormode changes to FRESH automaticallyto clear the windshield quickly. If youwant to return the setting to RECIRCU-LATE mode, press the air intake selec-tor button once again.

5. Windshield— Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging/defrosting function with the pur-pose of clearing the windshield.

In this position, air intake selectormode changes to FRESH automaticallyto clear the windshield quickly. It is notpossible to return to RECIRCULATE inthis position.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

05 11.29


TS19002

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate (indicator light is on)—Re-circulates the air inside the vehicle.

2. Fresh (indicator light is off)—Drawsoutside air into the system.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

If the ambient temperature drops, the airintake mode will automatically changefrom RECIRCULATE to FRESH after a fewminutes. This automatic change controlmode can be cancelled by pushing andholding the button for longer than 2 sec-onds. The automatic change control modewill be reactivated if the ignition key isturned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

05 11.29


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open long enough for thehot air to escape. This operation allowsthe air conditioning to cool the interiormore quickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

05 11.29

Air flow selector settings Operating tips

TS19003


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards WARM (red

zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards COLD (blue

zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

TS19011

For quick cooling, turning the temperatureselector knob fully towards COLD (MAXA/C) changes the air intake selector modeto RECIRCULATE.

05 11.29


Ventilation


Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards COLD (blue

zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging

Condition: Moisture is on the inside of thewindshield.



zone) to heat;COLD (blue zone) tocool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the windshield.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, air in-take selector mode changes to FRESHautomatically to clear the windshieldquickly. If you want to return the settingto RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again. However,if the air flow selector is in the windshieldposition, it is not possible to return toRECIRCULATE.

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

Condition: Moisture is on the outside ofthe windshield.



zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the windshield.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, air in-take selector mode changes to FRESHautomatically to clear the windshieldquickly. If you want to return the settingto RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again. However,if the air flow selector is in the windshieldposition, it is not possible to return toRECIRCULATE.

� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choose floor/windshield air flow.

05 11.29


TS19004a

Open

Close

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe side vents. The side vents may beopened or closed as shown.

TS19005

The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed inside of the glove boxas shown and indicates that a filter hasbeen installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

TS19006

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

05 11.29

Side vents Air conditioning filter—


The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavytraffic flow, such as inner city or desertareas, early replacement may be required.(For scheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.)

TS19007

1. Open the glove box, and slide offthe damper as shown.

TS19008

2. Push in each side of the glove boxto disconnect the claws.

05 11.29

—Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter


TS19009

3. Remove the filter case by holdingboth sides.

TS19010

4. Remove the filter from the filtercase.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is the just moderately dusty, it maybe cleaned by blowing compressed airfrom the reverse surface. Do not wash oroil the filter.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When setting the filter to the filter case,ensure that the flat side of the filter isdown and the ribbed side is up.

Position the filter case so that the “↑UP”mark is pointing up and install it in thevehicle.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

05 11.29


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentAccessory meter 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intuitive parking assist 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holder 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag/cargo net hooks 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 1− 10


1. Compass

2. Outside temperature display

3. Clinometer

4. “SET” button

5. “E/M” button

05 11.29

Accessory meter—

TS10019


The accessory meter provides the fol-lowing information.

1. Compass(For details, see “—Compass” on page184 in this Section.)

2. Outside temperature(For details, see “—Outside tempera-ture display” on page 184 in this Sec-tion.)

3. Clinometer(For details, see “—Clinometer” onpage 188 in this Section.)

When the ignition switch is turned to“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-played just before the ignition switch isturned off will appear.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the accessory meter,the display will automatically be set to theinitial mode.

“E/M” button

This button is used to switch betweenEnglish/U.S. Customary System andmetric units of the outside temperaturedisplay.

Each time you push this button, the dis-play switches. The display variations areas follows;

Indication Outsidetemperature

English/U.S. CustomarySystem (E)

�F

Metric (M) �C

The initial mode will be English/U.S. Cus-tomary System units, however, if the unitis switched to metric and the ignitionswitch is off, it will display metric unitswhen the ignition switch is turned to “ON”.

“SET” button

This button is used to calibrate thecompass

For details, see “—Compass” on page 184in this Section.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

05 11.29


TS10005

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature. Thedisplayed value is updated.

To set the unit, push the “E/M” buttonuntil the desired unit display appears.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C (122�F).

If an abnormality exists in the connectionof the outside air temperature sensor,“−−�C” (“−−�F”) will appear on the display.If “−−�C” (“−−�F”) appears on the display,contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−�C” (“−−�F”)appears momentarily when the ignition isquickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if itgoes out soon.

TS10006

The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it indicates that the vehicleis heading north.

Displays Directions

NESW

NorthEast

SouthWest

The compass points north for about 3 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position, and then indicates theactual direction the vehicle facing. Whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”or “LOCK” position, it indicates the actualdirection for about 5 seconds and thenpoints in a random direction.

The compass may not indicates the cor-rect direction in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe accessory meter.)

� The battery has been disconnected.

05 11.29

—Outside temperature display —Compass


The compass works to calibrate the direc-tion automatically while the vehicle is inmotion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE COM-PASS” below.

If the direction is not indicated or thesystem does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

TS10007

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is in the accesso-ry meter.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the accessory meter. Doingthis may cause malfunction of thecompass sensor.

TS10008a

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicleand push and hold the “SET” button forabout 2 seconds. The zone number ap-pears on the outside temperature display.Select the zone number by pushing the“E/M” button, referring to the followingmap to determine where the vehicle is.

05 11.29


Zone numbers

After calibration, leave the system for 6seconds or push and hold the “SET” but-ton for about 2 seconds. The display willreturn to the outside temperature display.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

05 11.29

LS10048

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8


TS10009a

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and do asfollows.

1. Push and hold the “SET” button forabout 2 seconds. The zone number ap-pears on the outside temperature dis-play.

2. Push the “SET” button. “−−” will startmoving.

TS10010

3. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h(5 mph). If there is not enough spaceto drive in a circle, drive around theblock.

When the compass display returns to theoutside temperature display, calibration iscomplete.

When circling calibration fails, “Er” is dis-played for 2 seconds and then “COM-PASS” flashes. It also flashes when cir-cling calibration is not completed.

If you want to cancel the calibration be-fore it is complete, push the “SET” buttonfor about 2 seconds.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (power windows, etc.) asthey may interfere with the calibration.

05 11.29


CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

TS10011

The clinometer shows longitudinal and lat-eral inclination of the vehicle. The displayranges between 30� and −30�.

TS10004

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

05 11.29

—Clinometer Clock


TS10020a

The intuitive parking assist is designedto inform you of the approximate dis-tance between your vehicle and an ob-struction by buzzer while driving atapproximate 10 km/h (6 mph) or lesswhen parking the vehicle. This systemuses sensors to detect obstructions.

This system works when the ignition keyis at the “ON” position and the transmis-sion is in the “R” position.

The sensors work only when the transmis-sion is in the “R” position.

TS17017

To turn on: Push the switch

The indicator comes on and the buzzerwill sound.

To turn off: Push the switch again.

In the following cases, the buzzer willsound several times to indicate that thesystem is not working properly.

� When the temperature is extremely low.

� When any of the sensors are malfunc-tion.

If the buzzer keeps sounding intermittentlywith nothing close to the sensors, haveyour Toyota dealer check the system.

TS10022

This system is designed to inform you ofthe approximate distance between yourvehicle and an obstacle by buzzer.

Distance shown as A inmm (in.)

Buzzer

Approximately1500−1000 (59.1−39.4)

Intermittent

Approximately1000−500 (39.4−19.7)

Fastintermittent

Approximately500 (19.7)

Continuous

05 11.29

Intuitive parking assist


TS10023

Perceptible area

B: Approximately 1500 mm (59.1 in.)

Perceptible area is limited as shown inthe previous illustration. Check the areaaround the vehicle before driving and startdriving slowly.

CAUTION

� The intuitive parking assist is in-tended as an aid to assist you topark and is not a substitute foryour personal judgment. Make yourdriving decisions based on your ob-servations.

� Do not attach accessories or otherobjects to the vehicle within thesensor perceptible area. Doing somay cause the system to malfunc-tion, which might result in an acci-dent.

� In certain situations, the systemwill not function properly and whenthe vehicle approaches certain ob-jects, the system will not detectthose objects. Therefore, always ob-serve the area around the vehicleand do not rely solely on the sys-tem.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device compiles with Cana-dian ICES−001.

05 11.29


In the following cases, the system maynot work properly.

� When ice, snow, mud or other objectsbuild up on the sensor.

� When the vehicle is parked in extreme-ly high or extremely low temperaturefor a long period.

� When driving on bumpy or graveledroads or on grass.

� When a device such as a horn fromanother vehicle, motorcycle engine, oran air brake sound from a heavy−dutyvehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, nearyour vehicle.

� When attaching a two−way radio anten-na.

� When rain or water splashes on thesensor.

� When operating the vehicle on an in-clined surface.

� When a radio antenna or fender poleis mounted on your vehicle.

� When a towing hitch is mounted onyour vehicle.

The system may not detect the follow-ing.

� Thin objects such as a wire or rope

� Objects with a surface area too smallto reflect ultrasonic waves such aswire gauze

� Sound wave absorbing objects or mate-rial such as cotton or snow

� A person near the vehicle (dependingon the type of clothes worn)

� Objects with a sharp edge

� Small or short objects

� Tall objects with an upper part project-ing toward the vehicle

� Objects just under the bumper

� Objects very close to your vehicle

In the following cases, have yourToyota dealer check the system.

� When the bumper is damaged.

� When the buzzer keeps sounding inter-mittently even though nothing is closeto the sensors.

TS10001a

The power outlet is designed for powersupply for car accessories.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlet to be used.

05 11.29

Power outlet (12 VDC)


NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total capacity of 12VDC/120W.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

TS10002

This power outlet is designed for useas a power supply for electric ap-pliances.

The power outlet must only be used afterthe engine is started.

If the engine is started with the poweroutlet main switch on, the maximum ca-pacity of the power supply may decreaseto below the standard, or may be cut offcompletely, even when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

While the vehicle is being driven, themaximum capacity of the power outlet isalways 115 VAC/100W. When the vehicleis stationary, the maximum capacity of thepower outlet varies depending on the fol-lowing conditions (a) or (b):

(a) The maximum capacity is 115VAC/400W when the following condi-tion applies:

� Automatic transmission models: Theselector lever is in the “P” or “N” posi-tion.

� Manual transmission models: The shiftlever is in the neutral position and theclutch pedal is not depressed.

(b) The maximum capacity is 115VAC/100W when the following condi-tion applies:

� Automatic transmission models: Theselector lever is moved to any posi-tions other than “P” and “N”.

� Manual transmission models: Theclutch pedal is depressed.

A maximum capacity of 400W can only berestored by turning the power outlet mainswitch off and then on again under condi-tion (a) described above.

05 11.29

Power outlet (115 VAC)


The protection circuit may be activated tocut the power supply if any of the follow-ing conditions apply:

� The engine is started with the poweroutlet switch on.

� Use of electrical appliances exceedingthe maximum capacity is attempted.

A sound may be heard when theprotection circuit is activated. This isnormal and does not indicate a mal-function.

� Electrical appliances, which consumepower exceeding 100W, have beenused continuously for a long time per-iod.

� The total power usage by all electricalfeatures (headlights, air conditioning,etc.) has exceeded the total vehiclemaximum for an extended period oftime.

If the protection circuit is activated andthe power supply is cut, conduct the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe area, andthen securely apply the parking brake.

2. Check and ensure the following condi-tions:

Automatic transmission models: Theselector lever is in the “P” or “N” posi-tion.

Manual transmission models: The shiftlever is in the neutral position and theclutch pedal is not depressed.

3. Make sure that the power consumptionof the electric appliance is within themaximum capacity of the power outletand the appliance is not broken.

4. Push the power outlet main switchagain.

When the cabin temperature is high, openthe windows to cool the temperaturedown. Once it reaches the normal temper-ature, turn the power outlet main switchon again.

If the power supply is not resumed evenafter performing the above procedure,have the vehicle inspected by a Toyotadealer.

TS10003

Indicator light(green)

Indicator light(yellow)

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch located on the instrument panel.

The color of the indicator light changesaccording the maximum available capacity,as follows:

Illumination color Maximum capacity

Green and yellow 115 VAC/400W

Yellow 115 VAC/100W

To turn the power outlet off, push themain switch again. When the power outletis not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is off and that the indicator light isnot illuminated.

05 11.29


The power supply starts a few secondsafter the main switch is pressed.

If the main switch is pressed repeatedlyat short intervals, the indicator light mayremain unchanged, but this does not indi-cate a malfunction.

When the power outlet is in operation, thesound of the cooling fan may be heardfrom the right side of the luggagecompartment. This is normal and does notindicate a malfunction.

After removing a plug from the power out-let, ensure that the power outlet lid isproperly closed.

CAUTION

� Use of the power outlet when it iswet with drinking water or snowmay result in electrical shocks andis extremely dangerous. The poweroutlet must be thoroughly dried be-fore use.

� Do not allow children to use orplay with the power outlet.

� Be careful not to get any part ofyour body caught in the power out-let lid.

� When using electrical appliances,strictly follow any cautions and no-tices written on their labels and inthe manufacturers’ instruction man-uals.

� Do not modify, disassemble orrepair the power outlet or itsinverter, in any way. Doing so mayresult in unexpected malfunctionsor accidents, which could causeserious damage or injuries. Contacta Toyota dealer for any necessaryrepairs.

To prevent injuries and accidents, se-curely fix all electric appliances be-fore use and do not use any ap-pliances that may do any of the fol-lowing:

� Distract the driver while driving, orhamper safe driving.

� Result in a fire or burn injuries dueto the appliance rolling, falling oroverheating while driving.

� Emit steam, while the windows ofthe cabin are closed.

Do not perform any of the following.Doing so is very dangerous and maycause unexpected accidents, such aselectric shocks.

� Using the power outlet for electricheaters while sleeping.

� Contaminating the power outlet withliquid substances or mud.

� Handling electrical appliance plugsat the power outlet with wet handsor feet.

� Inserting foreign objects into thepower outlet.

� Using malfunctioning electric ap-pliances.

� Inserting inappropriate or badly fit-ting plugs into the power outlet.

05 11.29


NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn off all the vehicle’selectronic equipment and accesso-ries, such as the headlights, foglights and air conditioner, whenelectrical appliances that consumein excess of 100W are used contin-uously for long periods of time.

� To prevent any damage caused byheat, do not use any electrical ap-pliances that give off intense heatsuch as toasters, in any locationsincluding the internal or externaltrim, seats and deck.

� Do not use any electrical ap-pliances, which are easily affectedby vibration or heat, inside the ve-hicle. Vibration while driving, or theheat of the sun while parking, mayresult in damage to those electricalappliances.

� Keep the lid closed when the poweroutlet is not in use. Do not insertany items other than appropriateplugs, as this may cause electricalfailure or short circuits.

� After inserting a plug, gently closethe power outlet lid. Failure to doso may cause damage to the plug.

� If any electrical appliances are tobe used while driving, securely fas-ten both the appliances and theircables to prevent them from fa llingor getting caught any of the power-train components.

� Do not use plug adaptors to con-nect too many plugs to the poweroutlet.

� If the power outlet is loose when anelectrical appliance plug is con-nected, replace the outlet. Contacta Toyota dealer for any necessaryreplacements.

� If the power outlet gets dirty, turnthe main switch off and use a soft,clean, dry−wet cloth to wipe it gent-ly. Do not use any cleansing materi-als, such as organic solvents, wax,or compound cleaners, as thesemay damage the power outlet orcause it to malfunction.

� Keep the power outlet free fromdust and foreign materials andclean it regularly.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances even iftheir power consumption is below themaximum capacity. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,compressor−driven refrigerators, electrictools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer−controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Use of the power outlet may not bepossible if the vehicle battery voltage islow due to decreased battery capacity.

The integrated timers of electrical ap-pliances may not function properlywhen the power supply is cut by theprotection circuit.

05 11.29


Some electrical appliances may not op-erate properly unless they are installedon a level place.

The precise power outlet voltage cannotbe measured using commercial testers.If necessary, contact a Toyota dealer.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

TS10026

To open the glove box door, pull thelever.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

To use the auxiliary bo xes, open thelids as shown in the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

NOTICE

Type A—During hot weather, the inte-rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.Do not leave anything flammable ordeformable such as a lighter, glasses,etc. inside.

05 11.29

Glove box Auxiliary boxes—


TS10012

Type A (instrument panel)

TS10013

Type B (right side of luggage compart-ment)

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans securely. To usethem, observe the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other thancups or drink−cans in the cup holder,as such items may be thrown aboutand possibly injure people in the ve-hicle during sudden braking or in anaccident.

TS10018a

Type A (vehicles with automatic transmis-sion)

05 11.29

Cup holders


TS10027a

Type B (vehicles with manual transmis-sion)

Type A and B cup holders are equippedwith a detachable adapter for eachholder. When you remove the adapter,a bigger cup can be held in the holder.

TS10029

Type C

05 11.29


TS10028

Type C cup holders are equipped witha detachable mat.

TS10025a

Rear doors

The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle inthe bottle holder because the con-tents may spill when the door opensor closes.

05 11.29

Bottle holder


TS10014a

To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 226in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks folded in place on thefloor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors insteadof the tie−down hooks.

TS10015

Grocery bag hooks

TS10024

Cargo net hooks

These hooks are designed to hangthings like grocery bags or cargo net.

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo nethooks and rear tie−down hooks.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-cluded as an original equipment, thesehooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

� To prevent damage to the hooks, donot hang any object heavier than 4kg (8.8 lb.) in them.

� To prevent damage to the hook,avoid hanging things other than acargo net on it when using them ascargo net hooks.

05 11.29

Tie−down hooks Grocery bag/cargo net hooks


TS10016a

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat havetwo holes, then they are designed for usewith two locking clips. Attach the floor matto the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lockthe clips into the holes in the vehiclecarpet.

TS10017

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the vehicle carpet. If thefloor mat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

05 11.29

Floor mat


05 11.29


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaOff−road vehicle precautions 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break−in period 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converters 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear step bumper 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 2


TS20001

This vehicle belongs to the ut ility ve-hicle class, which has higher groundclearance and narrower tread in relationto the height of its center of gravity tomake it capable of performing in a widevariety of off−road applications. Specificdesign characteristics give it a highercenter of gravity than ordinary passen-ger cars. This vehicle design featurecauses this type of vehicle to be morelikely to rollover. And, utility vehicleshave a significantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles. An advan-tage of the higher ground clearance isa better view of the road allowing youto anticipate problems. It is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as ordinary passenger cars anymore than low−slung sports cars de-signed to perform satisfactorily underoff−road conditions. Therefore, sharpturns at excessive speeds may causerollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-vers, if at all possible. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or vehiclerollover causing death or seriousinjury.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

05 11.29

Off−road vehicle precautions


� Always slow down in gusty cross-winds. Because of its profile andhigher center of gravity, your ve-hicle is more sensitive to sidewinds than an ordinary passengercar. Slowing down will allow you tohave better control.

� When driving off−road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

� Do not drive horizontally acrosssteep slopes. Driving straight up orstraight down is preferred. Your ve-hicle (or any similar off−road ve-hicle) can tip over sideways muchmore easily than forward or back-ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

05 11.29

Break−in period Fuel


OCTANE RATING

Select premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (ResearchOctane Number 96) or higher foroptimum engine performance.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 91.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

05 11.29


NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveab ility problems occur ( poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

72 L (19.0 gal., 15.8 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

05 11.29

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries


TS20002

The three−way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not idle or park your vehicleover anything that might burn easi-ly such as grass, leaves, paper orrags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push−start or pull−start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel systems could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

05 11.29

Three−way catalytic converters


CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

� Keep the back door and back win-dow closed while driving. An openor unsealed back door and backwindow, may cause exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, open the windows andclose the back door and back win-dow to ensure plenty of fresh airenters the vehicle. If you can smellexhaust fumes even though thereare no other vehicles in the sur-rounding area, have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer.Continued inhalation of exhaustfumes can lead to death by gas poi-soning.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

05 11.29

Engine exhaust cautionsFacts about engine oilconsumption


The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 292 in Section 7−2.

This brake system has 2 independent hy-draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,the other will still work. However, the ped-al will be harder to press, and your stop-ping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses brake fluid pres-surized by the pump to power−assist thebrakes. If the brake booster fails duringdriving, the brake system warning lightcomes on and buzzer sounds continuous-ly. In this case, the brakes may not workproperly. If they do not work well, depressthe brake pedal firmly. If the brake systemwarning light comes on, immediately stopyour vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-er.

It is not a malfunction that the brake sys-tem warning light may stay on for 60 sec-onds after the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position.

05 11.29

Brake system


Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the brake system warninglight and buzzer. It is normal if the lightturns off and the buzzer stops soundingafter a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the enginecompartment after the engine is started orthe brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.This is a pump pulsating sound of thebrake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your brake fluidpressure reserve.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with “ABS” warning light)

The anti−lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock−up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti−lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti−lock brake system is in theself−check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

� You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

05 11.29


CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

TS20003

Type A

TS20004

Type B

05 11.29


“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), thefollowing systems do not operate, but thebrake system still operates conventionally.







When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels will lock up during asudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

“VSC TRAC” warning light may come onwith the “ABS” warning light (brake assistsystem warning light) when there is a mal-function somewhere in the anti−lock brakesystem (brake assist system).

If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are dri-ving.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions mayoccur, but do not indicate a malfunc-tion:


� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itturns off after a few seconds.

� With rear differential lock: The lightcomes on with rear differential locked.At this time, the anti−lock brake sys-tem, the brake assist system, the ve-hicle stability control system, the trac-tion control system and the activetraction control system do not operate.

05 11.29


DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding−down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding−down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle stops.

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 101 in Sec-tion 1−6.

TS20005

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

05 11.29

Brake pad wear limitindicators


TS20012

The rear bumper is for rear end protec-tion and easier step−up loading.

To get on the rear step bumper, use theshaded area between the arrows in theillustration.

CAUTION

� Do not allow more than one personto get on the rear step bumper ata time. It is designed for only oneperson.

� Never drive the vehicle with anyoneon the rear step bumper.

TS20006

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

TS20007

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

05 11.29

Rear step bumperYour Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identification number


LS20011

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics resulting in loss of control.

05 11.29

—Engine numberTheft prevention labels(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size— For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 219.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 218.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “Uniform tire quali-ty grading” that follows.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators— For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 299.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

05 11.29

Tire information——Tire symbols

TS20009


7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 299.

9. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 320.

10.Summer tire or all seasontire— An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 228.

TS20010

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

05 11.29

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


TS20011

This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

TS20008

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

TS20013

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

05 11.29

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire


This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear— The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C— The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

05 11.29

—Uniform tire quality grading


Temperature A, B, C— The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

05 11.29


Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these itemsare available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

the sum of—the sum of—(a) curb weight;

Maximum loaded vehicle weight(a) curb weight(b) accessory weight;Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) accessory weight(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) d ti ti i ht( ) y g(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

05 11.29

—Glossary of tire terminology



Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity or payload)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire orIntended outboard sidewall deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

05 11.29



Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

05 11.29


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below. Total load ca-pacity and seating capacity are alsodescribed on the tire and loading in-formation label. For location of the tireand loading information label, see“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 297.Total load capacity:

540 kg (1190 lb.)Total load capacity means combinedweight of occupants, cargo and lug-gage. Tongue load is included whentrailer towing.

Seating capacity:Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximumnumber of occupants whose esti-mated average weight is 68 kg (150lb.) per person. Depending on theweight of each person, the seating ca-pacity given may exceed the totalload capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occu-pants are within the seating ca-pacity, do not exceed the totalload capacity.

Towing capacity:2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Towing capacity means the maximumgross trailer weight (trailer weight plusits cargo weight) that your vehicle isable to tow.

05 11.29

Vehicle load limits


Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

� To prevent cargo and l uggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

� Do not place anything on theflattened seat or it may slideforward during braking.

� Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to sufferdeath or serious bodily injury,in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

05 11.29

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions


Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. (1400–750(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 237.

Z20004Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

Example on Your VehicleIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 540 kg (1190 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:

540 kg – 166 kg = 374 kg.(1190 lb. – 366 lb. = 824 lb.)

05 11.29

—Capacity and distribution


From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

374 kg – 176 kg = 198 kg.(824 lb. – 388 lb. = 436 lb.)

As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 225.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

05 11.29

Types of tires


All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 217.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originals.

05 11.29


05 11.29


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off−road driving precautions 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 244. . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 3


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, seat height, headrestraint height and steering wheelangle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Manual transmission: Press the clutchpedal to the floor and shift the trans-mission into neutral. Hold the clutchpedal to the floor until the engine isstarted. A starter safety device will pre-vent the starter from operating if theclutch pedal is not fully depressed.

Automatic transmission: Put the se-lector lever in “P”. If you need to re-start the engine while the vehicle ismoving, put the selector lever in “N”.A starter safety device will prevent thestarter from operating if the selectorlever is in any drive position.

4. Automatic transmission only: De-press the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the key to“START”. Release it when the enginestarts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page248 in Section 4.

05 11.29

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine—(a) Before cranking (b) Starting the engine


NOTICE

� Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P” (automatic) or in first orreverse (manual). If necessary, blockthe wheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

� Part−time four−wheel drive models—Toyota recommends not using four−wheel drive on dry hard−surfacedroads, because four−wheel driving willcause unnecessary noise and wear,and poor fuel economy.

� Part−time four−wheel drive models—Incold temperatures, noise may occurwhen driving in two−wheel drive beforethe transfer is warmed up. Therefore,first drive in four−wheel drive until thetransfer is warmed up.

05 11.29

Tips for driving in variousconditions


CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to skid or spin.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

When driving your vehicle off−road, pleaseobserve the following precautions to en-sure your driving enjoyment and to helpprevent the closure of areas to off−roadvehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas whereoff−road vehicles are permitted to trav-el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’spermission before entering private prop-erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-tions are wet, driving techniques shouldbe changed or travel delayed to pre-vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii andPuerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertainingto driving your vehicle off−road, consultthe following organizations.

� State and Local Parks and RecreationDepartments

� State Motor Vehicle Bureau

05 11.29

Off−road driving precautions


� Recreational Vehicle Clubs

� U.S. Forest Service and Bureau ofLand Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� Drive carefully when off the road.Do not take unnecessary risks bydriving in dangerous places.

� Do not grip the steering wheelspokes when driving off−road. Abad bump could jerk the wheel andinjure your hands. Keep both handsand especially your thumbs on theoutside of the rim.

� Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving insand, mud, water or snow.

� After driving through tall grass,mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., checkthat there is no grass, bush, paper,rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering ortrapped on the underbody. Clear offany such matter from the under-body. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adheringto the underbody, a breakdown orfire could occur.

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� When driving off−road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

NOTICE

� If driving through water, such aswhen crossing shallow streams,first check the depth of the waterand the bottom of the river bed forfirmness. Drive slowly and avoiddeep water.

� Take all necessary safety measuresto ensure that water damage to theengine or other components doesnot occur.

Water entering the engine air intakewill cause severe engine damage.

� Water entering the automatic trans-mission will cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of yourtransmission accompanied by vibra-tion, and ultimately damage.

� Water can wash the grease fromwheel bearings, causing rusting andpremature failure, and may also en-ter the differentials, transmissionand transfer case, reducing the gearoil’s lubricating qualities.

05 11.29


� Sand and mud that has accumulatedin brake drums and around brakediscs may affect braking efficiencyand may damage brake system com-ponents.

� Always perform a maintenance in-spection after each day of off−roaddriving that has taken you throughrough terrain, sand, mud, or water.For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−life hy-brid organic acid technology. (Coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology isa combination of low phosphates and or-ganic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”on page 294 in Section 7−2 for details ofcoolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For the Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shape toprovide enough power for winter starting.Section 7−3 tells you how to visually in-spect the battery. Your Toyota dealer andmost service stations will be pleased tocheck the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 292 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—they will be pleasedto help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

05 11.29

Winter driving tips


NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” (automatic) or into first or reverse(manual) and block the front wheels. Donot use the parking brake, or snow orwater accumulated in and around theparking brake mechanism may freeze,making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

TS30001

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow-ing a trailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For your safe-ty and the safety of others, you must notoverload your vehicle or trailer. Ask yourlocal Toyota dealer for further details be-fore towing.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

05 11.29

Dinghy towing Trailer towing


CAUTION

� The maximum gross trailer weight(trailer weight plus cargo weight)must never exceed 2268 kg (5000lb.). If towing a trailer and cargoweighing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), itis necessary to use a sway controldevice with sufficient capacity. Thecombination of the gross trailerweight added to the total weight ofthe vehicle, occupants and vehiclecargo must never exceed a total ofthe following.

Two−wheel drive models4173 kg (9200 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models4309 kg (9500 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight ofthe trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-hicle and trailer combination, cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

TS20007

� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross vehi-cle weight is the sum of weights ofthe unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

05 11.29


R30001

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight� 100 = 9 to 11 %

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumload of the following.

Weight carrying hitch227 kg (500 lb.)

Never load the trailer with moreweight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailer loadshould be in the front half of thetrailer and the remaining 40% in therear.

HITCHES

� If you wish to install a trailer hitch, youshould consult with your Toyota dealer.

� Use only a hitch recommended by thehitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weight re-quirement.

� The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

� The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

� Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

CAUTION

Do not tow the vehicle using thehooked portion of the weight carryinghitch. The hooked portion may breakand cause serious injury or damageto the vehicle.

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if soequipped.

05 11.29


I30100

1 Trailer ball load rating2 Ball diameter3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball sizefor the trailer coupler. Most couplersare stamped with the required trailerball size. The sizes you will most likelyfind stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

III 2 in.

II 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball tomatch or exceed the gross trailerweight rating of the trailer. The trailerball load rating should be printed onthe top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, thethreaded ball shank must protrude be-yond the bottom of the lock washerand nut at least 2 threads. The trailerball shank must be matched to the ballmount hole diameter size.

TS30003

TS30004

1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball3 Ball mount attachment

05 11.29


MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TOTRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailerball setup on must be the proper heightfor the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired .

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness .

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 297 in Sec-tion 7−2 and page 320 in Section 8 forinstructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

05 11.29


TS30006a

TRAILER LIGHTS

� Your vehicle is equipped with a wireharness stored in the rear end underbody. Your vehicle is fitted with a sock-et for trailer lights behind the rearbumper. Use either of them to connectand operate the trailer lights. However,the trailer lights must comply with fed-eral, state/provincial and local regula-tions. See your local recreational ve-hicle dealer or rental agency for thecorrect type of wiring and relays foryour trailer. Check for correct operationof the turn signals and stop lights eachtime you hitch up. Direct splicing maydamage your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

05 11.29


� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, following distance should beincreased when towing a trailer. Foreach 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allowat least one vehicle and trailer lengthbetween you and the vehicle ahead.Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,resulting in jackknifing and loss of con-trol. This is especially true on wet orslippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, prevent excessive clutchslippage by keeping engine rpm lowand not racing the engine. Always startout in first gear.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room befo-re changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not use sixth gear (manual),or do not put the transmission in “D”(automatic).

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 252 inSection 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P” (automatic)or in first or reverse (manual). Avoidparking on a slope with a trailer, butif it cannot be avoided, do so onlyafter performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

05 11.29


5. Shift into first or reverse (manual) or“P” (automatic) and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position(automatic) or the clutch pedal de-pressed (manual), start the engine.(With an automatic transmission, besure to keep the brake pedal de-pressed.)

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake (also footbrake on automatic transmission ve-hicles) and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page297 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Put the selector lever into the “D”when engine braking is not required.Driving with the selector lever in “4”will reduce the fuel economy. (For de-tails, see “Automatic transmission” onpage 115 in Section 1−7.)

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

05 11.29

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer


� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping and bra-king. Maintain a steady pace. Try totime the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the clutchor brake pedal. This causes prematurewear, overheating and poor fuel econo-my.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.

05 11.29


05 11.29


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 268. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 269. . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 4


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct starting pro-cedure given in “How to start the engine”on page 232 in Section 3 and that youhave sufficient fuel.

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page249 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three−way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 248 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to“START” with the accelerator pedal fullydepressed. Keep the key and acceleratorpedal in these positions for 15 secondsand release them. Then try starting theengine with your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-conds of cranking, release the key, waita few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

05 11.29

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine


To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water imme-diately. Then get immediate medicalattention. If possible, continue toapply water with a sponge or clothwhile en route to the medical office.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

05 11.29

(c) Jump starting


LS40034

Jumpercable

Positiveterminal(“+” mark) Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

Discharged battery

Boosterbattery

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

LS40035

Discharged battery

Negative terminal(“−” mark)

Jumper cable

Boosterbattery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting pointsare shown in the following illustrations:

TS40001

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

05 11.29


5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.

If another attempt is not successful, thebattery may be depleted. Have it checkedat your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 248 in thisSection.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

05 11.29

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot incr ease enginespeed


If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or neutral (manual) and ap-ply the parking brake. Turn off the airconditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or thecoolant is leaking, stop the engine im-mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. andthere are no obvious leaks, you mayhelp the engine cool down more quicklyby running it at about 1500 rpm for afew minutes with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,add coolant to the reservoir while theengine is running. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” on page 294 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

05 11.29

If your vehicle overheats


1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P” (auto-matic) or reverse (manual).

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of death or serious injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P” (automatic) or reverse(manual). Block the wheel diag-onally opposite to the one be-ing changed if necessary.

� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

05 11.29

If you have a flat tire—


NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair. TS40002

1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Jack2. Tool bag

To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.When storing the tool bag, make sureit is securely held by the tighteningstrap.

TS40029

Turn the jack joint by hand.To remove: Turn the joint in direction1 until the jack is free.To store: Turn the joint in direction 2until the jack is firmly secured to pre-vent it flying forward during a collisionor sudden braking.

05 11.29

—Required tools and sparetire


TS40027

To remove the spare tire on the backdoor:1. Aluminum wheel only—Remove

the wheel ornament.

TS40022

2. Turn the hold−down nuts counter-clockwise with the wheel nutwrench and remove them.

When storing the spare tire, put it inplace and secure it to prevent it fromflying forward during a collision orsudden braking.

TS40005

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

05 11.29

—Blocking the wheel


TS40007a

Aluminum wheel

TS40006

Steel wheel

3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrenchas shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

TS40008

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn.

05 11.29

—Removing wheel ornament —Loosening wheel nuts


CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may looseand the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

TS40009

Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.JACK POINTS:

Front—Under the frame side railRear—Under the rear axle housing

TS40030

Put a jack handle, jack handle exten-sions and jack handle end togetheras shown in the illustration.1. Jack handle end2. Jack handle extensions3. Jack handle

05 11.29

—Positioning the jack


TS40004

When connecting the jack handle ex-tension(s) and jack handle end, usethe jack handle to tighten the squarehead bolt. Make sure that the bolt fitsinto the depression on the joint.When connecting the jack handle ex-tension with the jack handle, tightenthe round head bolt by hand.

NOTICE

Tighten the square head boltsecurely. Otherwise, the exten-sion may come off and it maydamage the paint or vehiclebody.

LS40037

Front ofvehicle

6. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, as the jacktouches the vehicle and beginsto fit, double−check that it isproperly positioned.

Rear side only—When positioning the jack under therear axle housing, make sure thegroove on the top of the jack fits withthe rear axle housing.

TS40010

7. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle end into the jack (it is a loosefit) and turn it clockwise with the han-dle.

05 11.29

—Raising your vehicle


CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

TS40011

8. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

TS40012

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

05 11.29

—Changing wheels


TS40013b

9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire back and see if you can tightenthem more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loosen and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

TS40014

10.Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension coun-terclockwise with handle to lower thevehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench andturn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.Do not use other tools or any addition-al leverage other than your hands,such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.Make sure the wrench is securely en-gaged over the nut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

05 11.29

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle


CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 113 N·m(11.5 kgf·m, 85 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

TS40016a

Aluminum wheel

TS40015

Steel wheel

11.Reinstall the wheel ornament.Put the wheel ornament into positionand then tap it firmly with the side orheel of your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

� Take due care in handling theornament to avoid unexpectedpersonal injury.

� Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

NOTICE

Steel wheel: To prevent damageto the wheel ornament, do notattach it to the wheel on theback door.

05 11.29

—Reinstalling wheel ornament


12.Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 320 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.13.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 320 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

If your vehicle is equipped with the“AUTO LSD” system, you can use it inthis situation. (For details, see “AUTOLSD system” on page 127 in Section1−7.)

If your vehicle is equipped with therear differential lock system, you canuse it in this situation. (For details, see“Rear differential lock system” on page132 in Section 1−7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

05 11.29

—After changing wheels If your vehicle becomes stuck


NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

TS40017

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck


TS40018

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear



05 11.29

If your vehicle needs to betowed—


If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 265 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front— Use a towing dolly under therear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

From rear— Place the ignition key in the“ACC” position.

NOTICE

� When lifting wheels, take care toensure adequate ground clearancefor towing at the opposite end ofthe raised vehicle. Otherwise, thebumper and/or underbody of thetowed vehicle will be damaged dur-ing towing.

� Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position, as thesteering lock mechanism is notstrong enough to hold the frontwheels straight while towing.



(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

FULL−TIME FOUR−WHEEL DRIVEMODELS

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.

PART−TIME FOUR−WHEEL DRIVEMODELS

From front— Use a towing dolly under therear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

From rear— We recommend using a tow-ing dolly under the front wheels. If you donot use a towing dolly, place the ignitionkey in the “ACC” position, put the trans-mission in “N” and the transfer in “H2”.

05 11.29


NOTICE

� When lifting wheels, take care toensure adequate ground clearancefor towing at the opposite end ofthe raised vehicle. Otherwise, thebumper and/or underbody of thetowed vehicle will be damaged dur-ing towing.

� Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position when tow-ing from the rear without a towingdolly. The steering lock mechanismis not strong enough to hold thefront wheels straight.


TS40019

(c) Towing with sling typetruck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

TS40020

Front

TS40021

Rear

05 11.29

—Emergency towing


If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to the emergency towing eyeletsunder the front of the vehicle or theleft emergency towing eyelet under therear of the vehicle. Use extreme cautionwhen towing vehicles.

Vehicles with an automatic transmis-sion, use only the front towing eyeletwhen towing your vehicle.

NOTICE

� Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

� Vehicles with an automatic trans-mission, never tow a vehicle fromthe rear with four wheels on theground. This may cause seriousdamage to the transmission.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelet and towing cable orchain. The eyelet and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in neutral (manu-al) or “N” (automatic). The key must bein “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine run-ning).

Four−wheel drive models—On part−timefour−wheel drive models, put the transferin “H2”. On full−time four−wheel drivemodels, unlock the center differential.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

05 11.29


� Before emergency towing, check thatthe eyelet is not broken or damagedand that the installation bolts are notloose.

� Fasten the towing cable or chain se-curely to the eyelet.

� Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steadyand even force.

� To avoid damaging the eyelet, do notpull from the side or at a verticalangle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet isused to get out when your vehiclebecomes struck in mud, sand or oth-er condition from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower, make sure to observe the pre-cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,excessive stress will be put on theeyelet and the towing cable or chainmay break, causing serious injury ordamage.

� If the towing vehicle can hardlymove, do not forcibly continue thetowing. Contact your Toyota dealeror a commercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

� Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

� Keep away from the vehicle duringtowing.

The following methods are effective toget out when your vehicle is struck inmud, sand or other condition fromwhich the vehicle cannot be driven outunder its own power. Use extreme cau-tion when towing vehicles. In addition,keep away from the vehicles and towingcable or chain when towing.

� Remove the soil and sand in the frontand the back of the tires.

� Place a stone or wood under the tires.

05 11.29

—Emergency towing eyeletprecautions

—Tips for towing a stuckvehicle


TS40023

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of the “P” position to other posi-tions even though the brake pedal isdepressed, use the shift lock overridebutton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

TS40024

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalentinto the hole to push down the shiftlock override button. You can shiftout of the “P” position only whilepushing the button.

4. Shift into the “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 10 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

05 11.29

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever If you lose your keys


You can purchase a new wireless re-mote control transmitter at your Toyotadealer.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

05 11.29

If you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter


05 11.29


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 5


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 273 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

05 11.29

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

� When cleaning under floor or chas-sis, be careful not to injure yourhands.

� Exhaust gases cause the exhaustpipe to become quite hot. Whenwashing the vehicle, be careful notto touch the pipe until it has cooledsufficiently, as touching a hot ex-haust pipe can cause burns.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

05 11.29

Washing and waxing yourToyota


Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not useorganic substances or scrub them with ahard brush. This may damage the sur-faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances(gasoline, kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents), which may be tox-ic or cause damage.

� Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

05 11.29


Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re−painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.

CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags and curtainshield airbags from activating cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt does not come off,repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-ing−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

05 11.29

Cleaning the interior


Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel, console paneland switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

05 11.29


After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm .

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

05 11.29


05 11.29


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 284. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

05 11.29

SECTION 6


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, and trouble−free, safe, and eco-nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 285 inSection 7.

05 11.29

Maintenance requirements


If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 309 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the see−throughreservoir when the engine is cold. Seepage 294 in Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 295 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 306 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 295 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 292 in Section7−2 for additional information.

05 11.29

General maintenance


Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 296 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 209 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers

Check that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraint move up and down smooth-ly and that the locks hold securely in anylatched position. For folding−down rearseatbacks and swing−up rear seat cush-ions, check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure that thebelt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn ordamaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the lever has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicleis held securely with the selector lever in“P” position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including back dooroperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.

05 11.29


Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 297 in Section 7−2for additional information.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page299 in Section 7−2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 301 in Section 7−2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal al-most touches floor; vehicle pulls to oneside when braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

05 11.29

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

05 11.29

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 7− 1


1. Windshield and back window washerfluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse blocks

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

05 11.29

Engine compartment overview

TS71001


TS71002a

TS71003

Sparefuses

TS71004

TS71005

Vehicles with power outlet (115 VAC) only

05 11.29

Fuse locations


If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 289 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold, power steeringfluid reservoir and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

05 11.29

Do−it−yourself serviceprecautions


NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−s ilicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

� If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 293 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL


� “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

05 11.29

Parts and tools


Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


� Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze (forwinter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs” on page 309 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver

05 11.29


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 7− 2


LS72004

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 317 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

05 11.29

Checking the engine oil level


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

OIL003

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE10W−30 may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

API−02

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is added to some oil con-tainers to help you select the oil youshould use.

05 11.29


To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.If the level is low, add the coolant. (Forthe coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “L” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE


05 11.29

Checking the engine coolantlevel


Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your enginecoolant system with proper usage. “ToyotaSuper Long Life Coolant” is formulatedwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology and has been specificallydesigned to avoid engine cooling systemmalfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If either of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

TS72004a

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator ishigh.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

05 11.29

Checking the radiator andcondenser Checking brake fluid


Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 20times (until the brake pedal resistancedecreases and pedal travel increases).

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above,the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the r eservoirbecause brake fluid can harm yourhands or eyes. If fluid gets on yourhands or in your eyes, flush the af-fected area with clean water immedi-ately. If you still feel uncomfortablewith your hands or eyes, go to thedoctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wipe it off to prevent it from dam-aging the parts or paintwork.

TS71006

If cold O.K.

If coldadd

Close

If hotadd

If hot O.K.Open

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON �II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60�C—80�C or 140�F—175�F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10�C—30�C or 50�F—85�F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

05 11.29

Checking power steering fluid


Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. Ifthe fluid is cold, the level should be in the“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, thefluid level should be in the “HOT” range.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III to bring the level withinthe range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

TS72001

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on pages 316 and 320. Theyare also described on the tire andloading information label as shown.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure s hould be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

05 11.29

Checking tire inflationpressure


� Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

TS72002a

Tire pressuregauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

05 11.29


CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure ( underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “ ∆” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

05 11.29

Checking and replacing tires


The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep e nough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be repl aced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires. Also, on four−wheel drivemodels, all the tires must be thesame brand and have the sametread patterns.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.

05 11.29


For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 215 and 217.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

� Four−wheel drive models:Do not use tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction ortread patterns, as this maycause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting inloss of control.

Toyota recommends all tires be re-placed at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page253 for tire change procedure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be repl acedwith a new one.

TS72003

To equalize the wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.See “If you have a flat tire” on page253 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.

05 11.29

Rotating tires


When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, on four−wheel drive models, allthe tires must be the same brand andhave the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use snow tires other thanthe manufacturer’s recommended si-ze, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four−wheel drive models:Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the rear wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

05 11.29

Installing snow tires andchains


TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the front tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

05 11.29

Replacing wheels


Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four−wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

05 11.29

Aluminum wheel precautions


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 7− 3


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

TS73001

Terminals

Hold−downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

05 11.29

Checking battery c ondition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior


NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

Type A

Green DarkClear or light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

05 11.29

—Checking battery c ondition Battery recharging pr ecautions


TS73013

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good

Good

Blown

Blown

TS73002

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 287 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 321 in Section 8 for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by usingthe pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “PWROUTLET” fuse, which may be dispensablefor normal driving, and use it if its amper-age rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

05 11.29

Checking and replacing fuses


If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work, the wash-er tank may be empty. Add washerfluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

The high mounted stoplight consists of anumber of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burnout, take your vehicle to your Toyota deal-er to have the light replaced.

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

05 11.29

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—


The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo. W Type

Headlights — 60/55 A

Front turn signal/parking and frontside marker lights

— 21/5 B

Outside rear viewmirror illuminationlights

— 5 C

Rear turn signallights

5674 21 D

Tail/stop and rearside marker lights

7443 21/5 C

Back−up lights 921 18 C

License platelights

— 5 C

Interior light — 8 E

Luggage compart-ment light

— 8 E

A: HB2 halogenB: Single end bulbsC: Wedge base bulbsD: Wedge base bulbs (amber)E: Double end bulbs

TS73003

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connec-tor. Remove the rubber cover.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

05 11.29

—Headlights


TS73004

2. Release the bulb retaining springand remove the bulb. Install a newbulb and the bulb retaining spring.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of thebulb with the cutouts of the mountinghole.

TS73005

3. Install the rubber cover as shownand fit it securely on the boss. Plugin the connector.

Make sure the rubber cover fits securelyon the connector and the headlight body.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

TS73006

TS73007

05 11.29

—Front turn signal/parkingand front side marker lights


If either the left or right outside rearview mirror illumination light burns out,contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the outside rearview mirror illumination light bulbs byyourself. You may damage the ve-hicle.

TS73008

Use a flathead screwdriver which iswrapped with a cloth.

TS73009

TS73010

a: Back−up lightb: Tail/stop and rear side marker lightsc: Rear turn signal light

05 11.29

—Outside rear view mirrorillumination lights(on some models)

—Tail/stop and rear sidemarker, rear turn signal andback−up lights


TS73011

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

TS73012

05 11.29

—License plate lights


05 11.29


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 8


Overall length mm (in.) 4670 (183.9)

Overall width mm (in.) 1905 (75.0)

Overall height∗1 mm (in.) 1810 (71.3)∗2

mm (in.) 1830 (72.0)∗3

Wheelbase mm (in.) 2690 (105.9)

Front tread mm (in.) 1605 (63.2)

Rear tread mm (in.) 1605 (63.2)

Vehicle capacity weight(occupants + luggage)

kg (lb.) 540 (1190)

Towing capacity(trailer weight + cargo weight)

kg (lb.) 2268 (5000)∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: Two−wheel drive models∗3: Four−wheel drive models

Model:4.0L V6 (1GR−FE)

Type:6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):94.0 � 95.0 (3.70 � 3.74)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):3956 (241.4)

Fuel type:Select premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher for optimumengine performance.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):72 (19.0, 15.8)

05 11.29

Dimensions and weights Engine Fuel


ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)

Spark plug type:

DENSO K20HR−U11NGK LFR6C11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

With filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):With manual transmission

9.4 (9.9, 8.3)With automatic transmission

9.8 (10.4, 8.6)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyleneglycol based non−silicate, non−amine,non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

05 11.29

Service specifications


BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all thelights turned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

CLUTCH

Pedal free play, mm (in.):5—15 (0.2—0.6)

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.8 (1.9, 1.6)

Oil type:Gear Oil API GL−4 or GL−5


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS”(ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid inassuring optimum transmission perfor-mance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFType WS” may cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of your trans-mission accompanied by vibration, andultimately damage the automatic trans-mission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

TRANSFER (full−time four wheel drivemodels)


Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5


TRANSFER (part−time four wheel drivemodels)




DIFFERENTIAL

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):Front

Full−time four−wheel drive models1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Part−time four−wheel drive models1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

RearWithout rear differential lock

3.0 (3.2, 2.6)With rear differential lock

2.9 (3.1, 2.6)

05 11.29



Recommended oil viscosity:Front

Full−time four−wheel drive modelsAbove −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

Part−time four−wheel drive modelsSAE 75W−90

RearAbove −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Propeller shafts:

SpidersLithium base chassis grease, NLGINo.2

Slide yokesMolybdenum−disulfide lithium basechassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithiumbase multipurpose grease, NLGI No.2

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

54 (2.1)

Pedal free play, mm (in.): 1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44.1 lbf):

5—7 clicks

Fluid type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play: Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III

05 11.29


Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Tire sizeCold tire inflation pressure

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel sizeTire sizeFront Rear Spare

Wheel size

P265/70R17 113S 220 (2 2 32) 220 (2 2 32) 220 (2 2 32) 17 � 7 1/2JP265/70R17 113S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 � 7 1/2J

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 297 through 304 in Section 7−2.

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):113 (11.5, 85)

05 11.29

Tires


TS80001a

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

3. TOWING TAIL 15 A: Trailer lights

4. OFFROAD LP 15 A: Offroad lamp

5. STOP 10 A: Stop lights, high mountedstoplight, anti−lock brake system, trac-tion control system, active traction con-trol system, vehicle stability controlsystem, “AUTO LSD” system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, shift locksystem

6. AUX LP 15 A: Driving lamp

TS80002

Instrument panel

7. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

8. HEAD (LO RH) 10 A: Right−handheadlight (low beam) (vehicles withdaytime running light), right−hand head-light (vehicles without daytime runninglight)

9. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Left−hand head-light (low beam) (vehicles with daytimerunning light), left−hand headlight (ve-hicles without daytime running light)

10. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Right−hand head-light (high beam)

TS80003a

Engine compartment

11. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Left−hand head-light (high beam)

12. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

13. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running lightsystem

14. DEFOG 30 A: Back window defogger

15. DEFOG NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel in-jection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system

16. DOME 10 A: Interior light, luggagecompartment light, clock, accessorymeter, meter and gauge

05 11.29

Fuses


17. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system

18. ECU−B 10 A: Air conditioning system,multiplex communication system, SRSairbag system, front passenger occu-pant classification system

19. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

20. HORN 10 A: Horn

21. A/F HEATER 15 A: Multiport fuel injec-tion system/sequential multiport fuel in-jection system

22. TRN−HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights,emergency flashers

23. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, electronic throttle controlsystem

24. EFI 20 A: “EFI NO.2” fuse, Multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system

25. DR/LCK 20 A: Door lock system, mul-tiplex communication system

26. TOWING 15 A: Towing converter

27. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system

28. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, anti−lock brake system, vehiclestability control system, traction controlsystem, active traction control system,“AUTO LSD” system, SRS airbag sys-tem, front passenger occupant classifi-cation system

29. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

30. FR WIP−WSH 30 A: Windshield wipersand washer

31. 4WD/DIFF 20 A: Four−wheel drive sys-tem, rear differential lock system

32. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlet

33. RR WSH 15 A: Back window wiperand washer, multiplex communicationsystem

34. ECU−IG 10 A: Anti−lock brake system,vehicle stability control system, tractioncontrol system, active traction controlsystem, “AUTO LSD” system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, cruise con-trol system, back door lock system,shift lock system, multiplex communica-tion system

35. IG1 15 A: Turn signal lights, air condi-tioning system, charging system, clutchstart cancel switch, anti−lock brakesystem, traction control system, activetraction control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system, “AUTO LSD” system,back−up lights, intuitive parking assist,rear differential lock system, power out-let, accessory meter, meter and gauge

36. STA 7.5 A: Starting system, clutchstart cancel switch, power outlet

37. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license platelights, parking lights, instrument panellight control, illuminations

38. ACC 7.5 A: Shift lock system, outsiderear view mirrors, audio system, poweroutlet, clock, accessory meter, multi-plex communication system

Fuses (type B)

39. AM1 50 A: “ACC”, “ECU−IG”, “IG1”,“PR WSH”, “FR WIP−WSH”, “4WD/DIFF” and “STA” fuses

40. J/B 50 A: “TAIL”, “PWR OUTLET”,“POWER”

41. ABS MTR 40 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem, vehicle stability control system,traction control system, active tractioncontrol system, “AUTO LSD” system

05 11.29


42. AM2 30 A: “IGN” and “GAUGE” fuses,multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system,starting system

43. ABS SOL 30 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem, vehicle stability control system,traction control system, active tractioncontrol system, “AUTO LSD” system

44. POWER 30 A: Power windows

45. AC 115V 80 A: Power outlet

Fuses (type C)

46. ALT 120 A: “AM1”, “AC 115V”,“DEFOG”, “DEFOG NO.2”, “STOP”,“OBD”, “J/B”, “TOWING TAIL”, “AUXLP” and “OFFROAD LP” fuses

47. HEATER 60 A: Air conditioning system

05 11.29


05 11.29


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

05 11.29

SECTION 9


If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll−free at1−800−424−9393 (or 366−0123 in Wash-ington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA,U.S. Department of Transportation, Wash-ington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehicle safe-ty from the Hotline.

05 11.29

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners

foreword - brockandbecca.combrockandbecca.com/files/fj/fj_cruiser_owners_manual.pdf · quality...

Documents